WO2024004496A1 - 歯ブラシおよび歯ブラシ製造方法 - Google Patents
歯ブラシおよび歯ブラシ製造方法 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024004496A1 WO2024004496A1 PCT/JP2023/020258 JP2023020258W WO2024004496A1 WO 2024004496 A1 WO2024004496 A1 WO 2024004496A1 JP 2023020258 W JP2023020258 W JP 2023020258W WO 2024004496 A1 WO2024004496 A1 WO 2024004496A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- brush
- support
- depth direction
- support body
- circumferential direction
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61C—DENTISTRY; APPARATUS OR METHODS FOR ORAL OR DENTAL HYGIENE
- A61C17/00—Devices for cleaning, polishing, rinsing or drying teeth, teeth cavities or prostheses; Saliva removers; Dental appliances for receiving spittle
- A61C17/16—Power-driven cleaning or polishing devices
- A61C17/22—Power-driven cleaning or polishing devices with brushes, cushions, cups, or the like
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a toothbrush and a toothbrush manufacturing method.
- This application is filed in Japanese Patent Application No. 2022-106249 filed in Japan on June 30, 2022, Japanese Patent Application No. 2022-106010 filed in Japan on June 30, 2022, and Patent Application No. 2022-106010 filed in Japan on June 30, 2022.
- Japanese Patent Application No. 2022-204420 filed in Japan
- Japanese Patent Application No. 2022-209653 filed in Japan on December 27, 2022, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a mouthpiece-type toothbrush that is electrically driven.
- the electric toothbrush disclosed in Patent Document 1 includes a mouthpiece arranged on a support so that the cleaning element, which is a brush portion, simultaneously engages substantially all teeth in at least one of the upper and lower jaws of the user.
- an electric drive unit removably fixed to the mouthpiece and having at least one vibrating element for performing a vibratory movement.
- the mold due to the positional relationship of the brush portion with respect to the support, the mold is moved in an undercut state to forcibly release (forcibly remove) the molded product. Therefore, the brush portion must be made as soft as possible and arranged in a simple manner in consideration of ease of removal from the mold. As a result, the stiffness of the hair decreases, there are restrictions on the level difference profile that can be designed, and cleaning power cannot be fully demonstrated. A problem arises. Furthermore, the brush part cannot be optimized for each part of the oral cavity, and the advantage of the mouthpiece type, which can brush the entire oral cavity at once, cannot be fully utilized. Furthermore, the support body is also made of the same material as the brush part, which is as soft a resin material as possible. Therefore, if the support is bitten during use, the support tends to spread excessively. As a result, a problem arises in that the fit to the dentition is impaired.
- the toothbrush disclosed in Patent Document 1 is a mouthpiece type in which a brush portion and a support body are integrally molded from a soft resin. Therefore, compared to a long toothbrush with a regular bristled bristles, the diameter of the tip of the brush is thicker, making it difficult to reach between the teeth and periodontal pockets, and the density of the bristles is less dense than that of the bristles. There are problems in that the contact area with the teeth and gums decreases, and the direction of deflection tends to be constant, making it difficult to feel the brushing effect. Therefore, users who expect the texture and cleaning effect of a typical toothbrush tend to rate the cleaning experience low.
- the support body has a U-shaped part that supports the brush part on the side closer to the grip part, and a U-shaped part that supports the brush part on the side farther from the grip part. , and a connecting part that connects these two parts.
- the connecting part connects the two U-shaped parts in the entire circumferential direction, which is the length direction, so the distance between the two U-shaped parts does not change, and the two U-shaped parts are connected integrally. Vibrate. That is, in the toothbrush disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the brush part located on the outside of the tooth and the brush part located on the inside of the tooth operate integrally, the outside and inside teeth having different circumferential lengths and shapes The fit to the row is impaired and the feeling of cleaning is reduced.
- the present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and provides a toothbrush and a toothbrush manufacturing method that can realize sufficient cleaning performance for each part of the oral cavity and a high fit of the support to the dentition.
- the primary purpose is to
- a second object of the present invention is to provide a toothbrush and a toothbrush manufacturing method that improve the feeling of cleaning and the cleaning performance.
- a third object of the present invention is to provide a toothbrush that provides a high fit to the dentition and provides a high feeling of cleaning.
- a fourth object of the present invention is to provide a toothbrush that improves its fit to the dentition.
- the present invention has the following aspects. [1] It has a gripping part and a connecting body connected to the gripping part, and the connecting body includes a brush part which is a first molded body and a second molded body different from the first molded body. and a support body that supports the brush part along a circumferential direction centered on an axis extending in the meshing direction, and the brush part includes a base part, a filament extending from the base part, and a support body that supports the brush part along a circumferential direction centered on an axis extending in the meshing direction, and the brush part includes a base part, a filament extending from the base part, and a support body that supports the brush part
- a toothbrush comprising: a connecting part provided in the support body and connected to the support body.
- the brush portion according to [1] is arranged in plurality in at least one of the circumferential direction, the meshing direction, and a depth direction perpendicular to the circumferential direction and the meshing direction. toothbrush.
- At least one of the brush parts is formed of a soft resin with a Shore A hardness of 40 or more and a Shore D hardness of 70 or less, and the thickness of the base part in the depth direction is 1 mm or more and 5 mm or less.
- the brush portion is arranged separately on the outside and inside in the depth direction, and The brush part on the outside and the brush part on the inside each have a central region including the circumferential center of the support and an end region located at the circumferential end of the support. and the distance between the filament with the shortest bristle length in the outer brush part in the end region and the filament with the shortest bristle length in the inner brush part is equal to The toothbrush according to any one of [2] to [4], wherein the distance between the filament having the shortest bristle length in the brush portion and the filament having the shortest bristle length in the inner brush portion .
- the filament extends from the brush surface of the base portion, and a straight line distance connecting both ends of the brush surface in the circumferential direction is 5 mm or more, according to any one of [1] to [5].
- toothbrush [7] The toothbrush according to any one of [1] to [6], wherein the support is made of a harder resin than the brush portion. [8] Any one of [1] to [7], wherein the brush portion has a portion where the arrangement pitch of the root portion and the arrangement pitch of the tip portion of the plurality of filaments arranged in the circumferential direction are different. The toothbrush described in.
- the connecting body includes a brush part that is a first molded body, and a second molded body different from the first molded body, and supports the brush part along a circumferential direction centered on an axis extending in the meshing direction.
- a method for manufacturing a toothbrush comprising: preparing the support; and bonding the brush portion to the support at the bonding portion.
- a gripping part and a connecting body connected to the gripping part, and the connecting body includes a brush part whose base part is provided with a bundle of bristles, and a material different from that of the base part.
- a toothbrush comprising: a support that is molded with a material, covers at least a portion of the base portion, and supports the brush portion along a circumferential direction centered on an axis extending in the meshing direction.
- the brush portions are arranged separately on the outer side and the inner side in the depth direction, and the outer brush portion and the inner brush portion are arranged in a central region of the support body including the center in the circumferential direction. and an end region located at the end of the circumferential direction of the support, and the bristle bundle having the shortest bristle length in the outer brush portion in the end region, and the inner bristle bundle.
- the distance between the bristle bundle with the shortest bristle length on the brush part in the central region is the distance between the bristle bundle with the shortest bristle length on the outer brush part and the shortest bristle length on the inner brush part in the central region.
- a plurality of hair bundle rows in which a plurality of hair bundles are arranged in the circumferential direction are provided in a plurality of rows in the meshing direction, and the hair bundle in at least one of the hair bundle rows located at an end in the meshing direction.
- the toothbrush according to any one of [12] to [14], wherein the bristles are inclined toward the end with respect to the root.
- the brush portion has a portion where the arrangement pitch of the root portion and the arrangement pitch of the tip portion of the plurality of hair bundles arranged in the circumferential direction are different from each other.
- WA1 be the length in the engagement direction of the base portion of the outer brush portion located in the central region, and the engagement of the base portion of the outer brush portion located in the end region.
- the length in the direction is WA3
- the length in the engagement direction of the base portion of the inner brush portion located in the central region is WB1
- the length of the base portion in the inner brush portion located in the end region is WB1.
- the gripping section has an electric drive unit including a vibration element, and the connecting body vibrates by driving the vibration element, according to any one of [12] to [17].
- toothbrush. It has a gripping part and a connecting body connected to the gripping part, and the connecting body includes a brush part whose base part is provided with a bundle of bristles, and a material different from that of the base part.
- a method for manufacturing a toothbrush comprising: preparing the support; and bonding the brush portion to the support. [20] A gripping portion, and a connecting body connected to the gripping portion on one side in the depth direction perpendicular to the meshing direction, the connecting body being connected to the gripping portion on one side in the depth direction.
- the first brush body is formed in a U-shape along a circumferential direction centering on an axis extending in the meshing direction, and includes a first support body that is open on one side in the depth direction; and a first support body that is opened on one side in the depth direction. and a first brush portion extending from the side toward the other side in the depth direction, and the second brush body is formed in a U-shape along the circumferential direction and has a second brush portion that is open on one side in the depth direction.
- the first support and the second support at positions facing each other in the depth direction have different shape characteristics including the dimension in the depth direction or material characteristics including hardness, according to [20] above. Toothbrush as described.
- the dimension of the first support in the depth direction is 1.5 mm or more and 7 mm or less, and the dimension of the second support in the depth direction is 1.5 mm or more and 6 mm or less, and The toothbrush according to [21], wherein the depth direction dimension of the circumferential end portion of the first support member is larger than the depth direction dimension of the circumferential end portion of the second support member.
- the ratio of the length of a region separated from the second support in the depth direction is 20% or more and 70% or less, The toothbrush according to any one of [20] to [22].
- the toothbrush according to any one of [20] to [23], wherein at least one of the second hard plates provided along the circumferential direction on the second support is provided.
- the first rigid plate applies tension to the other side in the depth direction to the first support when a load is applied to the first support in the one side in the depth direction
- the second hard plate is configured to apply tension to one side in the depth direction to the second support when a load is applied to the second support in the other side in the depth direction.
- a connecting portion that connects the first support and the second support in the depth direction, and the connecting portion is an elastic body that elastically deforms in the depth direction in response to deformation in the meshing direction.
- a connecting portion connecting the first support and the second support in the depth direction, and when the connecting portion is compressed in the meshing direction, the first support and the second support are connected in the depth direction.
- a second brush body located between the grip portion and the first brush body in the depth direction and spaced apart from the first brush body; , the first brush body includes a first support body formed in a U-shape opening on one side in the depth direction along a circumferential direction centered on an axis extending in the meshing direction; a first brush portion extending from the body to the other side in the depth direction, and the second brush body is formed in a U-shape opening on one side in the depth direction along the circumferential direction.
- a toothbrush that has an adjustment part that can adjust the distance.
- the adjustment portion is provided at least at a central position in the circumferential direction of the first support and the second support.
- the adjustment unit is capable of continuously changing the distance between the first support body and the second support body according to the load in the depth direction on the adjustment unit, [28] ] The toothbrush according to any one of [31] above.
- the adjustment section has a third brush section on at least one of one side and the other side in the meshing direction.
- the present invention it is possible to realize a high degree of cleaning experience due to the sufficient cleaning performance of each site in the oral cavity and the high fit of the support to the dentition. Further, the present invention can provide a toothbrush and a toothbrush manufacturing method that improve the feeling of cleaning and the cleaning performance. Further, it is possible to provide a toothbrush that fits well to the dentition and provides a high feeling of cleaning. Moreover, it is possible to provide a toothbrush that improves the fit to the dentition.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an embodiment of the present invention, and is a front view of a toothbrush 1 according to a first embodiment.
- FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of a brush portion 30 in a first embodiment of a mouthpiece portion 20.
- FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 1.
- FIG. It is a figure which looked at 31 A of inner upper brush parts from the upper side. It is a side view of the inner upper brush portion 31B viewed from the right side. It is a figure which looked at 32 A of outer upper brush parts from the upper side. It is a side view of outer upper brush part 32B and outer upper brush part 32C seen from inside.
- FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of a support body 50 in the first embodiment of the mouthpiece section 20.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an embodiment of the present invention, and is a front view of a toothbrush 1 according to a first embodiment.
- FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of a brush portion 30 in
- FIG. 3 is a perspective cross-sectional view of a support body 50 in the first embodiment of the mouthpiece section 20.
- FIG. It is a side view which shows the modification of a joint part.
- FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of the coupling portion.
- FIG. 7 is a plan view schematically showing a mouthpiece section 20 of a second embodiment. It is a top view which shows typically the mouthpiece part 20 of 3rd Embodiment.
- FIG. 3 is a side view schematically showing the mouthpiece section 20 before elastic members 81 and 82 are attached. It is a top view which shows typically the mouthpiece part 20 of 4th Embodiment.
- FIG. 3 is a side view schematically showing the mouthpiece section 20 before elastic members 81 and 82 are attached.
- FIG. 3 is a view of the brush section 130 in the mouthpiece section 120 viewed from above.
- FIG. 18 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 17. It is a figure which looked at 131 A of inner upper brush parts from the upper side. It is a figure which looked at 132 A of outer upper brush parts from the upper side.
- FIG. 7 is an external perspective view of a support body 150 in a fifth embodiment of a mouthpiece section 120.
- FIG. 7 is a perspective cross-sectional view of a support body 150 in a fifth embodiment of the mouthpiece section 120.
- 7 is a perspective view showing a modification of the mouthpiece section 120.
- FIG. 7 is an external perspective view of a sixth embodiment of a mouthpiece section 220.
- FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 26.
- FIG. 26 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 25.
- FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the first brush body 230, the second brush body 260, and the connecting portion 280, excluding the connecting portions with the first brush portion 241, the second brush portion 271, and the grip portion 210.
- 27 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 26.
- 27 is a schematic diagram taken along the line BB in FIG. 26, and is a partial sectional view of a mouthpiece portion 220 according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.
- 27 is a schematic diagram taken along the line BB in FIG. 26, and is a partial sectional view of a mouthpiece portion 220 according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.
- 27 is a schematic diagram taken along the line BB in FIG. 26, and is a partial sectional view of a mouthpiece portion 220 according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention.
- 27 is a schematic diagram taken along the line BB in FIG.
- FIG. 26 is a partial sectional view of a mouthpiece portion 220 according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention.
- 27 is a schematic diagram taken along the line BB in FIG. 26, and is a partial sectional view of a mouthpiece portion 220 according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention.
- 27 is a schematic diagram taken along the line BB in FIG. 26, and is a partial sectional view of a mouthpiece portion 220 according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 7 is a side view of a first hard plate 236 and a second hard plate 266 that constitute a mouthpiece section 220 according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention, viewed from the left side.
- FIG. 7 is an external perspective view of a mouthpiece portion 320 according to a sixteenth embodiment.
- 47 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 46.
- FIG. 46 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 45.
- FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first brush body 330, the second brush body 360, and the connecting portion 380 excluding the connecting portions with the first brush portion 341, the second brush portion 371, and the grip portion 310.
- FIG. 7 is a front view of a state in which a fitting protrusion 351 and a fitting cylinder part 356 are separated in the depth direction.
- FIG. 7 is a front view of a state in which the fitting protrusion 351 is inserted into the fitting cylinder part 356.
- FIG. 7 is a front view of a mouthpiece section 320 according to a seventeenth embodiment.
- FIG. 12 is a front view of a fitting protrusion 351 and a fitting cylinder part 356 separated in the depth direction according to the eighteenth embodiment of the mouthpiece part 320.
- FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial front view of an adjustment section 350 according to a nineteenth embodiment of a mouthpiece section 320.
- FIG. 7 is a partial front view of an adjustment section 350 according to a twentieth embodiment of a mouthpiece section 320.
- the Z-axis direction is a direction parallel to the direction in which the axis J extends in the meshing direction, and is an up-down direction.
- the ⁇ direction is a circumferential direction centered on the axis J, and is a direction along the tooth row.
- the circumferential direction in this embodiment includes not only a direction along a circular arc centered on the axis J but also a direction along a tangent to the circular arc.
- the Y-axis direction is a direction perpendicular to the ⁇ direction and the Z-axis direction, and is the depth direction in the oral cavity.
- the direction parallel to the Z-axis direction will be referred to as the "meshing direction.”
- the upper jaw side which is the positive side in the Z-axis direction
- the lower jaw side which is the negative side in the Z-axis direction
- the positive side in the ⁇ direction is called the “left side”
- the negative side in the ⁇ direction is called the “right side.”
- the lingual side which is the positive side in the depth direction, is called the “inner side”
- the buccal side which is the negative side in the depth direction
- FIG. 1 is a front view of a toothbrush 1 according to a first embodiment.
- the toothbrush 1 is a mouthpiece type toothbrush, and includes a grip part 10 and a connecting body 20.
- the connecting body 20 will be referred to as a mouthpiece section 20.
- the connecting body 20 is subjected to vibration via the grip portion 10 .
- a shaft 14 protrudes from the grip portion 10 and is connected to a mouthpiece portion 20. Note that the shaft 14 protruding from the mouthpiece section 20 may be connected to the grip section 10.
- the connecting body 20 is subjected to vibration from the gripping section 10 via the shaft 14.
- the present invention provides a configuration in which the grip section 10 manually applies a brushing motion to the mouthpiece section 20 in up and down, left and right, front and rear directions, and a combination thereof, a configuration in which vibration is manually applied, and a configuration in which the mouthpiece section 20 is manually applied with a brushing motion from the grip section 10 to the mouthpiece section 20. It is applicable to any configuration in which vibration is applied electrically to the piece portion 20. In this embodiment, a configuration will be described in which the grip portion 10 is provided with an electric drive unit and vibrations generated by driving the electric drive unit are applied to the mouthpiece portion 20.
- the electric drive unit includes a power supply section 11, a vibration element 12, and a control section 13.
- the control unit 13 drives the vibration element 12 using the power from the power supply unit 11 .
- the power supply unit 11 includes, for example, a rechargeable battery, a battery, or the like.
- the vibration element 12 is composed of, for example, a piezoelectric element, an electromagnetic acoustic transducer, an unbalanced motor, or the like.
- the vibration generated by the vibration element 12 is a vibration in which the rotation direction is rotated about an axis extending in the depth direction, and the rotation direction is repeatedly reversed at a constant predetermined rotation angle.
- the shaft 14 connected to the electric drive unit in the grip part 10 vibrates by repeatedly reversing its rotational direction. When the shaft 14 is vibrated by the drive of the vibrating element 12, the mouthpiece portion 20 vibrates by repeatedly reversing the direction of rotation.
- FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the brush section 30 in the first embodiment of the mouthpiece section 20.
- FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the brush portion 30 viewed from inside in the depth direction.
- the brush portions 30 are arranged separately on the outside and inside in the depth direction.
- the brush section 30 has an inner brush section 31 and an outer brush section 32.
- the inner brush portion 31 is located on the inner side in the depth direction.
- the inner brush portion 31 includes upper inner brush portions 31A, 31B, and 31C and lower inner brush portions 31D, 31E, and 31F.
- the inner upper brush parts 31A, 31B, and 31C are located on the upper side and are arranged to face the tongue-side tooth surface of the maxillary tooth row along the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush portions 31A, 31B, and 31C are provided in a U-shape, with the inner upper brush portion 31A being the center, and the inner upper brush portions 31B and 31C being spaced apart from each other on both sides in the circumferential direction.
- the inner lower brush parts 31D, 31E, and 31F are located on the lower side facing the inner upper brush parts 31A, 31B, and 31C, respectively, and are arranged to face the lingual tooth surface of the lower jaw row of teeth.
- the inner lower brush parts 31D, 31E, and 31F are provided in a U-shape, with the inner lower brush part 31D being the center, and the inner lower brush parts 31E and 31F being spaced apart from each other on both sides in the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush part 31B and the inner upper brush part 31C are line symmetrical in the left-right direction, so a description of the inner upper brush part 31C may be omitted.
- the inner lower brush parts 31D, 31E, and 31F are line-symmetrical with the inner upper brush parts 31A, 31B, and 31C in the meshing direction, the explanation of the inner lower brush parts 31D, 31E, and 31F may be omitted.
- the inner upper brush portion 31A is arranged at the center position in the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush portion 31A has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in a direction convex to the outside when viewed from above. Both circumferential sides of the inner upper brush portion 31A are curved along the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush portion 31A is mainly arranged to face the tongue-side tooth surfaces of the plurality of front teeth on the maxillary side. Therefore, a plurality of brush parts 30 are arranged in each of the circumferential direction, the meshing direction, and the depth direction.
- FIG. 3 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG.
- the inner upper brush portion 31A has a base portion 41, a filament 42, and a coupling portion 43.
- the base portion 41 has a rectangular cross section.
- FIG. 4 is a diagram of the inner upper brush portion 31A viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 4, the base portion 41 has portions on both sides in the circumferential direction that are curved in an outwardly convex direction when viewed from above.
- the toothbrush 1 is designed to move the brush part 30 manually or electrically using the brush part 30 arranged along the row of teeth. can be placed along the lingual side of the dentition, improving cleaning and fitting properties. Further, it becomes possible to maximize the installation area of the brush section 30, and in the case of electric power, it can contribute to improvement of vibration efficiency and cleaning power.
- the length of the base portion 41 in the circumferential direction is 15 mm or more, it is preferably curved along the circumferential direction.
- the length of the base portion 41 is less than 15 mm, the advantage of curving the base portion 41 itself is reduced, so a plurality of linearly extending base portions 41 may be arranged along a curved contour. If the length of the base portion 41 exceeds 150 mm, it will be excessively large relative to the size of the oral cavity, resulting in poor operability and fit, so it is preferable that the length is 150 mm or less.
- the base portion 41 be curved. If the radius of curvature of the mouthpiece portion 20 is less than 5 mm, it will be difficult to fit it to the support 50, and the pitch of the bristles of the filament 42 will change excessively, resulting in interference between the bristles or loose bristles. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the plurality of brush parts 30 along the curved contour of the base part 41. When the radius of curvature of the mouthpiece portion 20 exceeds 50 mm, it can be considered to have a straight shape.
- the length L of the base portion 41 is defined as a straight line distance connecting both ends of the brush surface 41a in the circumferential direction.
- the length L of the base portion 41 is preferably 5 mm or more, more preferably 15 mm or more. By setting the length L of the base portion 41 to 5 mm or more, it is easy to feel the fit, and since vibrations are difficult to attenuate in the case of electric motors, they are easily transmitted to the end, and cleaning performance can be improved.
- the brush portion 30 includes a length L of the base portion 41 that is at least twice the width of the base portion 41 in the meshing direction. By giving priority to the length L over the width of the base portion 41, it is possible to unify the texture and fit of each tooth or area (front teeth, back teeth, etc.).
- the base portion 41 is removably fitted into a fitting recess 61A (details will be described later) in the inner support body 51 from the outside.
- the base portion 41 is coupled to the inner support body 51 by fitting the upper and lower surfaces forming the coupling portion 43 into the fitting recess 61A.
- the inner upper brush portion 31A can be replaced with respect to the inner support body 51. Therefore, the user can replace the brush section 30 and change the specifications according to his/her preference or situation, making it possible to meet a wide variety of needs.
- the thickness, which is the dimension in the depth direction of the base portion 41 is preferably 1 mm or more, and more preferably 2 mm or more.
- the thickness, which is the dimension in the depth direction of the base portion 41 is preferably 5 mm or less, more preferably 4 mm or less.
- the upper and lower limits of the thickness, which is the dimension in the depth direction of the base portion 41 can be arbitrarily combined. Further, if the bonding force between the base portion 41 and the inner support body 51 can be ensured, the thickness of the base portion 41 is preferably 0.3 to 1.2 mm.
- the thickness of the base part 41 is 0.3 to 1.2 mm, so that the volume does not become excessively large, which improves drool prevention, operability, and It can also contribute to improved fit.
- the thickness of the base portion 41 in the depth direction is preferably 50% or more and 90% or less of the thickness of the inner support 51 in the depth direction.
- the thickness of the inner support 51 in the depth direction is the sum of the depth of the fitting recess 61A and the thickness of the thin portion located inside the fitting recess 61A.
- the base portion 41 By setting the thickness of the base portion 41 in the depth direction to 50% or more and 90% or less of the thickness of the inner support 51 in the depth direction, the base portion 41 is stably fixed to the inner support 51 and the electric If the thickness is sufficient for efficient transmission of vibrations. Furthermore, since the volume does not become excessively large, it can contribute to prevention of drooling, improved operability, and improved fit.
- the filament 42 extends outward from the outwardly facing brush surface 41a of the base portion 41.
- the brush surface 41a has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in an outwardly convex direction when viewed from above.
- the filaments 42 include a filament 42A extending outward from the upper end of the brush surface 41a, a filament 42B extending outward from a position below the filament 42A, and a filament 42C extending outward from a position below the filament 42B. and has.
- the filament 42 has a smaller inclination angle with respect to the meshing surface K as it approaches the meshing surface K in a side view seen parallel to the meshing surface K.
- the farther from surface K the larger it is.
- the inclination angle of the filament 42A that is close to the gum side and farthest from the engagement surface K is larger than the inclination angle of the filament 42B and the filament 42C.
- the angle of inclination of the filament 42C closest to the mating surface K is smaller than the angle of inclination of the filaments 42A and 42B.
- the arrangement pitches of the filaments 42A and 42B, and the filaments 42B and 42C, which are adjacent to each other in the meshing direction, in the circumferential direction are shifted by, for example, a half pitch. That is, when viewed in the direction facing the brush surface 41a, the filaments 42A, 42B, and 42C are arranged in a staggered manner.
- the filaments 42A, 42B, and 42C are arranged in a staggered manner.
- the filaments 42 protrude and extend radially outward from the brush surface 41a.
- the inner upper brush portion 31A constituting the brush portion 30 has a portion where the arrangement pitch of the root portion of the filament 42 is different from the arrangement pitch of the tip portion at a portion where the base portion 41 is curved.
- the arrangement pitch P2 of the tips of the filaments 42 is larger than the arrangement pitch P1 of the roots.
- the value expressed by P2/P1 is preferably 1.05 or more and 2.00 or less.
- the value expressed by P2/P1 it is possible to form an arc along the tooth row on the tongue side surface at the tip of the filament 42, improving the fit.
- the pitch of the root part is denser than that of the tip part, it is possible to ensure the elasticity of the hair. Note that making the arrangement pitch different between the tips and roots and adjusting P2/P1 within the above range is not uniquely determined according to the curvature of the base 41. For example, when the base 41 is straight, It may also be carried out in areas such as .
- the inner upper brush portion 31B is located on the right side in the circumferential direction than the inner upper brush portion 31A, and extends to the end in the circumferential direction.
- the end of the inner upper brush section 31B closer to the inner upper brush section 31A has a shape that is an extension of the curved shape of the inner upper brush section 31A.
- the ⁇ side of the inner upper brush portion 31B has a linear shape that is tangent to the curved shape.
- the inner upper brush portion 31B is mainly arranged to face the tongue-side tooth surfaces of the maxillary canine teeth and back teeth (premolars, molars).
- FIG. 5 is a side view of the inner upper brush portion 31B viewed from the right side.
- the upper surface of the inner upper brush portion 31B is inclined downward toward the ⁇ side. That is, the width, which is the dimension in the meshing direction, of the inner upper brush portion 31B becomes thinner from the + ⁇ side toward the ⁇ side.
- the filaments 42A and 42B are arranged along the slope of the upper surface of the inner upper brush portion 31B in a direction that goes downward toward the ⁇ side.
- the filaments 42C are arranged halfway in the ⁇ direction as the width of the inner upper brush portion 31B becomes thinner on the ⁇ side. Therefore, the filaments 42 are arranged in three rows in the meshing direction on the + ⁇ side, and in two rows in the meshing direction on the ⁇ side.
- the base portion 41 of the inner lower brush portion 31D is removably fitted into a fitting recess 61D (details will be described later) in the inner support body 51 from the outside.
- the base portion 41 is coupled to the inner support body 51 by fitting the upper and lower surfaces forming the coupling portion 43 into the fitting recess 61D.
- the inner lower brush portion 31D can be replaced with respect to the inner support body 51. Therefore, the user can replace the brush section 30 and change the specifications according to his/her preference or situation, making it possible to meet a wide variety of needs.
- the inner lower brush portion 31D is vertically symmetrical with respect to the inner upper brush portion 31A in the engagement direction with the engagement surface K as the center.
- the filament 42A in the inner lower brush portion 31D extends outward from the lower end of the brush surface 41a.
- Filament 42B extends outward from a position above filament 42A.
- the filament 42C extends outward from a position above the filament 42B.
- the inclination angle of the filament 42A which is closest to the gum side and farthest from the interlocking surface K, with respect to the interlocking surface K is larger than the inclination angle with respect to the interlocking surface K of the filaments 42B and 42C.
- the angle of inclination of filament 42C closest to engagement surface K with respect to engagement surface K is smaller than the angle of inclination of filament 42A and filament 42B.
- the outer brush portion 32 is located on the outer side in the depth direction.
- the outer brush section 32 includes upper outer brush sections 32A, 32B, 32C, 32D, and 32E, and lower outer brush sections 32F, 32G, 32H, 32J, and 32K.
- the outer upper brush parts 32A, 32B, 32C, 32D, and 32E are located on the upper side and are arranged to face the buccal tooth surface of the maxillary tooth row along the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush parts 32A, 32B, 32C, 32D, and 32E are arranged such that the outer upper brush parts 32B and 32C are sequentially arranged at intervals on the right side in the circumferential direction with the outer upper brush part 32A at the center.
- 32E are sequentially arranged at intervals on the left side in the circumferential direction, and are provided in a U-shape as a whole.
- the lower outer brush parts 32F, 32G, 32H, 32J, and 32K are located on the lower side facing the upper outer brush parts 32A, 32B, 32C, 32D, and 32E, respectively, and are connected to the buccal tooth surface of the lower jaw row of teeth. placed facing each other.
- the outer lower brush portions 32F, 32G, 32H, 32J, and 32K are arranged with the outer lower brush portion 32F at the center, and the outer lower brush portions 32G and 32H are sequentially arranged at intervals on the right side in the circumferential direction.
- 32K are sequentially arranged at intervals on the left side in the circumferential direction, and are provided in a U-shape as a whole.
- the outer upper brush part 32B and the outer upper brush part 32D are line symmetrical in the left-right direction
- the outer upper brush part 32C and the outer upper brush part 32E are line symmetrical in the left-right direction.
- the explanation of the upper brush parts 32D and 32E may be omitted.
- the lower outer brush parts 32F, 32G, 32H, 32J, and 32K are line symmetrical with the upper outer brush parts 32A, 32B, 32C, 32D, and 32E in the meshing direction, the lower outer brush parts 32F, 32G, and 32H , 32J, and 32K may be omitted.
- the outer upper brush portion 32A is arranged at the center position in the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 32A has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in a direction convex to the outside when viewed from above. Both circumferential sides of the outer upper brush portion 32A are curved along the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 32A is mainly arranged to face the buccal tooth surfaces of the plurality of front teeth on the maxillary side.
- the outer upper brush portion 32A has a base portion 71, a filament 72, and a coupling portion 73.
- the base portion 71 has a rectangular cross section.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram of the outer upper brush portion 32A viewed from above.
- the base portion 71 has portions on both sides in the circumferential direction that are curved along the circumferential direction in a direction convex to the outside when viewed from above.
- the filament 72 can be placed along the buccal side of the tooth row, and cleaning and fitting properties can be improved.
- the base portion 71 is removably fitted into a fitting recess 62A (details will be described later) in the outer support body 52 from the inside.
- the base portion 71 is coupled to the outer support body 52 by fitting the upper and lower surfaces forming the coupling portion 73 into the fitting recess 62A.
- the outer upper brush portion 32A can be replaced with respect to the outer support body 52.
- the filament 72 extends inward from the inwardly facing brush surface 71a of the base portion 71.
- filament 72 faces filament 42.
- the brush surface 71a has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in an outwardly convex direction when viewed from above.
- the filaments 72 include a filament 72A extending outward from an upper end on the brush surface 71a, a filament 72B extending outward from a position below the filament 72A, and a filament 72B extending outward from a position below the filament 72B.
- the filament 72C extends outward from the position.
- the inclination angle of the filament 72A that is close to the gum side and farthest from the engagement surface K is larger than the inclination angle of the filament 72B and the filament 72C.
- the angle of inclination of filament 72C closest to mating surface K is smaller than the angle of inclination of filament 72A and filament 72B.
- the filament 72C can be fitted to the tip of the teeth on the buccal side, and the filament 72A can be fitted to the buccal side. It can be fitted to the gum side.
- the arrangement pitches of the filaments 72A and 72B, and the filaments 72B and 72C, which are adjacent to each other in the meshing direction, in the circumferential direction are shifted by, for example, a half pitch. That is, when viewed in the direction facing the brush surface 71a, the filaments 72A, 72B, and 72C are arranged in a staggered manner.
- the filaments 72A, 72B, and 72C are arranged in a staggered manner.
- the filaments 72 protrude and extend radially inward from the brush surface 71a.
- the outer upper brush portion 32A constituting the brush portion 30 has a portion where the arrangement pitch of the root portion of the filament 72 is different from the arrangement pitch of the tip portion at a portion where the base portion 71 is curved. Specifically, the arrangement pitch P4 of the tips of the filaments 72 is smaller than the arrangement pitch P3 of the roots.
- the arrangement pitch between the filaments 72 at the root and tip By varying the arrangement pitch between the filaments 72 at the root and tip, it is possible to adjust the balance between rigidity and ease of bending, improving cleaning power.
- the value expressed by P4/P3 is preferably 0.3 or more and 0.9 or less.
- the value expressed by P4/P3 By setting the value expressed by P4/P3 to 0.3 or more and 0.9 or less, for example, by increasing the arrangement pitch of the root portion of the filament 72, the filament is made sparse to ensure operability.
- By reducing the arrangement pitch of the bristles it is possible to form an arcuate shape that follows the buccal tooth row and improve the fit. Note that making the arrangement pitch different between the tips and roots and adjusting P4/P3 within the above range is not uniquely determined according to the curvature of the base 71. For example, when the base 71 is straight, It may also be carried out in areas such as .
- the outer upper brush portion 32B is located on the right side in the circumferential direction than the outer upper brush portion 32A.
- the outer upper brush portion 32C is located on the right side in the circumferential direction than the outer upper brush portion 32B.
- the circumferential end of the outer upper brush portion 32C on the side (+ ⁇ side) closer to the outer upper brush portion 32B has a shape that is an extension of the curved shape of the outer upper brush portion 32A.
- the ⁇ side of the outer upper brush portion 32C has a linear shape that is tangent to the curved shape.
- the outer upper brush portion 32C is mainly arranged to face the buccal tooth surfaces of a plurality of back teeth (premolars, molars) on the upper jaw side.
- the outer upper brush portion 32B When viewed from above, the outer upper brush portion 32B has a linear shape connecting the ⁇ side end of the outer upper brush portion 32A and the + ⁇ side end of the outer upper brush portion 32C.
- the outer upper brush portion 32B has a short circumferential dimension, and as described above, the advantage of curving it is reduced, so it is formed in a straight line shape.
- FIG. 7 is a side view of the upper outer brush portion 32B and the upper outer brush portion 32C viewed from inside.
- the upper surfaces of the outer upper brush portion 32B and the outer upper brush portion 32C are inclined downward toward the ⁇ side. That is, the width, which is the dimension in the meshing direction, of the outer upper brush portion 32B and the outer upper brush portion 32C becomes thinner from the + ⁇ side toward the ⁇ side.
- the slopes of the upper surfaces of the upper outer brush portion 32B and the upper outer brush portion 32C are on the same straight line.
- the filaments 72 in the outer upper brush portion 32B and the outer upper brush portion 32C are arranged along the slope of the upper surface. Since the widths of the outer upper brush portion 32B and the outer upper brush portion 32C are thicker than the width of the inner upper brush portion 31B, the filaments 72A, 72B, and 72C are arranged in three rows over the entire length in the circumferential direction. are arranged in
- the base portion 71 of the outer lower brush portion 32F is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62F (details will be described later) in the outer support body 52 from the inside.
- the base portion 71 is coupled to the outer support body 52 by fitting the upper and lower surfaces forming the coupling portion 73 into the fitting recess 62F.
- the outer lower brush portion 32F can be replaced with respect to the outer support body 52.
- the lower outer brush portion 32F is vertically symmetrical with respect to the upper outer brush portion 32A in the engagement direction with the engagement surface K as the center.
- the filament 72A in the outer lower brush portion 32F extends inward from the lower end of the brush surface 71a.
- the filament 72B extends inward from a position above the filament 72A.
- the filament 72C extends inward from a position above the filament 72B.
- the angle of inclination of the filament 72A, which is closest to the gum side and farthest from the engagement surface K, with respect to the engagement surface K is larger than the inclination angle of the filament 72B and the filament 72C with respect to the engagement surface K.
- the angle of inclination of filament 72C closest to engagement surface K with respect to engagement surface K is smaller than the angle of inclination of filament 72A and filament 72B.
- the distance between the tips of the filaments 42 of the inner brush portion 31 and the filaments 72 of the outer brush portion 32 described above differs depending on the position in the circumferential direction.
- the outer brush portion 32 and the inner brush portion 31 each have a central region including the circumferential center of the support 50 and an end region located at the circumferential end of the support 50.
- An intermediate region is provided between the central region and the end regions.
- the central region is the region that primarily faces the front teeth.
- the end region is mainly the region facing the premolars to the molars.
- the intermediate region is mainly the region facing the canine to premolar teeth. As shown in FIG.
- the central region is a first region A1, the middle region is a second region A2, and the end region is a third region A3.
- the central region is defined as a first region B1, the intermediate region is defined as a second region B2, and the end region is defined as a third region B3.
- the distance between the tips of the hair between the first area A1 and the first area B1 is set as D1
- the distance between the tips of the hair between the second area A2 and the second area B2 is set as D2
- the distance between the tips of the hair between the third area A3 and the third area B3 is set as D1.
- Let the distance between the tips of the hair be D3.
- the inter-bristle distance D1 is the distance between the filament 72 of the outer brush portion 32 with the shortest bristle length in the first region A1 and the filament 42 of the inner brush portion 31 with the shortest bristle length in the first region B1.
- the inter-bristle distance D2 is the distance between the shortest filament 72 of the outer brush portion 32 in the second region A2 and the shortest filament 42 of the inner brush portion 31 in the second region B2.
- the inter-bristle distance D3 is the distance between the filament 72 of the outer brush portion 32 with the shortest bristle length in the third region A3 and the filament 42 of the inner brush portion 31 with the shortest bristle length in the third region B3.
- the shortest distance between the bristles is the distance between the inner and outer bristles in the depth direction, which are on the same plane perpendicular to the circumferential direction (i.e., a plane extending in the depth direction) with the inner support 51 as a reference.
- This value is measured as the distance between the tips of the shortest hairs.
- the distance between the bristles is a value measured when viewed in the interlocking direction (for example, from above). In other words, the two bristles measured as the distance between the bristles may be at different positions in the interlocking direction.
- the plane is a virtual space with a thickness of ⁇ 0.5 mm in the circumferential direction, and the hairs are When it enters space, it is assumed that it lies on the same plane. In other words, it is assumed that the shortest hairs in the depth direction are on the same plane if the distance in the circumferential direction is within 1.0 mm.
- the distances D1 and D3 between the tips of the hair satisfy the relationship D3>D1.
- the distance D3 between the bristles in the area that mainly faces the back teeth including premolars and molars is larger than the distance D1 between the bristles in the area that mainly faces the front teeth.
- Front teeth are thin, so the distance between the teeth is small, and back teeth are thick, so the distance between the teeth is large.
- the distances between the bristles D1, D2, and D3 satisfy the relationship D3>D2>D1.
- the gap in the depth direction between the outer brush section 32 and the inner brush section 31 is larger in the second regions A2, B2 than in the first regions A1, B1, and in the third regions A3, B3 than in the second regions A2, B2. big.
- the vibration generated by the electric drive unit is due to the rotational movement of the shaft 14, and the amplitude is large in the third regions A3 and B3 where the radius of rotation around the shaft 14 is large. Depending on this vibration characteristic, it becomes possible to provide an optimal space (range of motion) between the tips of the hair.
- the area from the center in the circumferential direction to 40% is the first area A1, B1, and the area from 40% to 65%. If 65% to 100% are the second regions A2 and B2, and 65% to 100% are the third regions A3 and B3, it is preferable that the distances between the hair tips D1, D2, and D3 satisfy the relationship D1 ⁇ D2 ⁇ D3.
- the stiffness of the filament 72 satisfies the relationship: first region A1 ⁇ second region A2 ⁇ third region A3.
- the stiffness of the filament 42 preferably satisfies the relationship: first region B1 ⁇ second region B2 ⁇ third region B3.
- the thickness of the filament 72 preferably satisfies the relationship: first area A1 ⁇ second area A2 ⁇ third area A3.
- the thickness of the filament 42 preferably satisfies the relationship: first region B1 ⁇ second region B2 ⁇ third region B3.
- the longest hair length of the filament 72 satisfies the relationship of first region A1 ⁇ second region A2 ⁇ third region A3. It is preferable that the longest hair length of the filament 42 satisfies the relationship: first region B1 ⁇ second region B2 ⁇ third region B3.
- filaments 42 and 72 having different hair lengths and steps are arranged in the circumferential direction.
- the arrangement profile of the hair length step differs at least between the second region A2 and the third region A3, and between the second region B2 and the third region B3. It is preferable that the size of the maximum hair length step satisfies the relationship of second area A2 ⁇ third area A3 and the relationship of second area B2 ⁇ third area B3. Further, when the arrangement profile of the hair length step is repeated at a constant cycle, it is preferable that the cycle satisfies the relationship of second area A2 ⁇ third area A3 and the relationship of second area B2 ⁇ third area B3.
- the total number of filaments 42, 72 in each brush portion 30 is preferably 10 to 150. If the total number of filaments 42, 72 is less than 10, the scraping force will be insufficient and the cleaning function will deteriorate. If the total number of filaments 42, 72 exceeds 150, the filaments 42, 72 are tightly packed together and difficult to bend, resulting in poor fit and poor cleaning performance. By setting the total number of filaments 42, 72 to 10 to 150, the cleaning function and fit can be improved.
- the total number of filaments 72 in the outer brush portion 32 is preferably 300 to 1,800.
- the total number of filaments 42 in the inner brush portion 31 is preferably 200 to 1,400. Since the outer brush portion 32 has a large area facing the tooth row, by setting the total number of filaments 72 within the above range, the tooth row can be covered over a wide range.
- the total number of filaments 72 in the second area A2 and the third area A3 on the left and right sides is greater than the total number of filaments 72 in the first area A1. Further, it is preferable that the total number of filaments 42 in the second region B2 and the third region B3 on the left and right sides is greater than the total number of filaments 42 in the first region B1.
- the brush section 30 is composed of a plurality of inner brush sections 31 and outer brush sections 32 in the depth direction.
- the inner brush part 31 is composed of a plurality of inner upper brush parts 31A, 31B, 31C and inner lower brush parts 31D, 31E, 31F
- the outer brush part 32 is composed of an outer upper brush part 32A, 32B, 32C, 32D, and 32E, and a plurality of outer lower brush portions 32F, 32G, 32H, 32J, and 32K.
- the brush portion 30 includes a plurality of inner brush portions 31 and a plurality of outer brush portions in the circumferential direction.
- each part of the oral cavity can be cleaned with specifications suitable for oral cavity cleaning (improving hair stiffness, setting a step profile according to the shape of the dentition, etc.). Can be cleaned thoroughly.
- the brush section 30 is configured in plural in each direction of the depth direction, the engagement direction, and the circumferential direction, the cleaning section can be optimized more precisely according to each region.
- the number of rows of filaments 42, 72 in the meshing direction may be two or less.
- the width of the brush portion 30 in the meshing direction is preferably 2 mm or more and 5 mm or less.
- the width of the brush portion 30 in the meshing direction is preferably 2 mm or more and 20 mm or less.
- the maximum width of the brush portion 30 is defined according to the width of the support body 50.
- the width of the brush portion 30 increases, thereby increasing the rigidity in the width direction and making the brush portion 30 less likely to bend. Therefore, the cleaning power of the brush portion 30 can be increased. Furthermore, when the mouthpiece section 20 is electrically driven, vibration damping can be suppressed even if the length of the brush section 30 in the circumferential direction increases.
- a plurality of brush portions 30 When a plurality of brush portions 30 are provided, three or more brush portions are preferably provided in the circumferential direction. When a plurality of brush portions 30 are provided, the number is preferably nine or less in the circumferential direction, and more preferably seven or less. The upper limit and lower limit when a plurality of brush portions 30 are provided in the circumferential direction can be arbitrarily combined. When a plurality of brush parts 30 are provided, the number is preferably one or more, and more preferably two or more in the meshing direction. When a plurality of brush parts 30 are provided, the number is preferably four or less, more preferably three or less in the meshing direction. The upper limit and lower limit when a plurality of brush parts 30 are provided in the meshing direction can be arbitrarily combined.
- the circumferential direction is broadly divided into three areas: front, right, and left, and further subdivided into five areas: front, right, left, midway between the front and right, and midway between the front and left. , making it possible to design specifications that correspond to each area.
- the width direction it is considered to be broadly divided into upper and lower jaws, and it is possible to design specifications that correspond to the upper and lower jaws.
- the mouthpiece section 20 is electric, vibrations are less likely to be attenuated and transmitted more easily, and the cleaning function can be improved.
- the length of the brush portion 30 in the circumferential direction is preferably 5 mm or more and 150 mm or less.
- the length of 5 mm corresponds to one front tooth of a child.
- the length of 150 mm corresponds to the total circumferential length of the support body 50 on the outside. If the circumferential length of the brush portion 30 is 5 mm or more, a precise fit can be achieved up to one front tooth of the smallest child. If the circumferential length of the brush portion 30 is 150 mm or less, when the mouthpiece portion 20 is manually moved, the excess area that deviates from the tooth alignment will be reduced, steric hindrance in the oral cavity will be reduced, and operability will be improved. Can be secured. Moreover, when the mouthpiece part 20 is electric, it can be fitted to the entire tooth row while reducing vibration damping.
- the brush portion 30 described above is a first molded body integrally molded with a soft resin. More specifically, the inner brush portion 31 is a first molded body in which a base portion 41, a filament 42, and a connecting portion 43 are integrally molded.
- the outer brush portion 32 is a first molded body in which a base portion 71, a filament 72, and a connecting portion 73 are integrally molded. Since the brush part 30 is the first molded body and is a separate member from the support body 50, restrictions on the hardness and profile of the brush part 30 are relaxed, and specifications (bristle stiffness) suitable for oral cavity cleaning are made for each part of the oral cavity. (e.g., setting a step profile that matches the shape of the dentition), each part of the oral cavity can be thoroughly cleaned.
- the brush portion 30 is made of soft resin, it can be easily elastically deformed. Therefore, even if the brush portion 30 is curved in the circumferential direction, by forming the brush portion 30 into a straight line and then curving it, it is possible to avoid forced removal during forming. Furthermore, the bristles of the filaments 42 and 72 can be made to conform to the shape of the jaw, resulting in a high fit. If the mouthpiece section 20 is electric, vibrations caused by the electric power can be easily transmitted, improving the cleaning function. Can be done.
- elastomers can be used as the soft resin constituting the brush portion 30, including polyurethane and silicone.
- Polyurethane tends to have higher tensile strength and mechanical wear resistance than other elastomers such as styrene and polyester, so using polyurethane as a soft resin makes it difficult to break even when made thin. , mechanical strength and can enable long-term use.
- Silicone has particularly high heat resistance and chemical resistance, and can reduce quality deterioration when sterilized by boiling or in the presence of toothpaste.
- At least one of the brush parts 30 is preferably formed of a soft resin having a Shore A hardness of 40 or more, and more preferably formed of a soft resin having a Shore A hardness of 70 or more. At least one of the brush parts 30 is preferably formed of a soft resin with a Shore D hardness of 70 or less, and more preferably formed of a soft resin with a Shore D hardness of 66 or less. The upper and lower limits of the hardness of the soft resin forming at least one of the brush parts 30 can be arbitrarily combined.
- “Shore A hardness” means the durometer A hardness of plastics measured according to JIS K 7215 or JIS K 6253.
- “Shore D hardness” means durometer type D hardness specified in JIS K 6253.
- the hardness of the soft resin is less than the above lower limit, there will be insufficient scraping force, and if the mouthpiece section 20 is electric, there will also be insufficient vibration transmission, resulting in a reduced cleaning function.
- the hardness of the soft resin exceeds the above upper limit, the filaments 42, 72 and the base portions 41, 71 become difficult to bend, resulting in poor fit and poor cleaning performance.
- the brush part 30 is the first molded body, and it is possible to avoid forced removal during molding, so it has higher hardness than when the brush part 30 and the support body 50 are integrally molded. resin can be used. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cleaning function can be improved by making the filaments 42 and 72 hard enough to remove dental plaque. In addition, in order to minimize the volume occupied in the oral cavity, it is preferable that the bristles be shorter than that of a general integrally molded toothbrush. In this embodiment, by defining the upper limit of the hardness in the brush portion 30, the filaments 42, 72 can be bent and moved even though the bristles are relatively short.
- FIG. 8 and 9 are external perspective views of the support body 50 in the first embodiment of the mouthpiece section 20.
- FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the support body 50 viewed from inside in the depth direction.
- FIG. 9 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 8, and is a perspective sectional view of the support body 50 viewed from outside in the depth direction. In FIG. 8, illustration of the shaft 14 is omitted.
- the support body 50 supports the brush portion 30 along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the support 50 includes an inner support 51, an outer support 52, and a connecting portion 53.
- the inner support body 51 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from above.
- the inner support body 51 has an upper wall part 54 located at the upper end and extending along the circumferential direction, a lower wall part 55 located at the lower end and extending along the circumferential direction, and the upper wall part 54 and the lower wall part 55 in the meshing direction.
- An intermediate wall portion 56 located between and extending along the circumferential direction, and connecting wall portions 57, 58, 59 extending in the meshing direction and connecting the upper wall portion 54 and the lower wall portion 55 via the intermediate wall portion 56.
- the upper wall portion 54, the lower wall portion 55, and the intermediate wall portion 56 are arranged throughout the circumferential direction.
- the connecting wall portion 57 and the connecting wall portion 58 are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction.
- the connecting wall portions 59 are formed at both ends in the circumferential direction.
- the inner support body 51 has fitting recesses 61A, 61B, and 61C located on the upper side and fitting recesses 61D, 61E, and 61F located on the lower side.
- the fitting recesses 61A, 61B, 61C and the fitting recesses 61D, 61E, 61F are recessed inward from the surface of the inner support 51 facing outward in the depth direction.
- the fitting recess 61B and the fitting recess 61C are line symmetrical in the left-right direction, so the description of the fitting recess 61C may be omitted or simplified. Furthermore, since the fitting recesses 61D, 61E, and 61F are line symmetrical with the fitting recesses 61A, 61B, and 61C in the meshing direction, the description of the fitting recesses 61D, 61E, and 61F may be omitted or simplified in some cases. .
- the base portion 41 of the inner upper brush portion 31A is removably fitted into the fitting recess 61A from the outside.
- the upper wall portion 54 and the intermediate wall portion 56 fit into the joint portion 43 of the inner upper brush portion 31A in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall portion 57 and the connecting wall portion 58 connect with the base portion 41 in the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush portion 31A is removably coupled.
- the base portion 41 of the inner upper brush portion 31B is removably fitted into the fitting recess 61B from the outside.
- the upper wall part 54 and the intermediate wall part 56 fit into the joint part 43 of the inner upper brush part 31B in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall part 57 and the connecting wall part 59 fit into the base part 41 in the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush portion 31B is removably coupled.
- the base portion 41 of the inner lower brush portion 31D is removably fitted into the fitting recess 61D from the outside.
- the lower wall part 55 and the intermediate wall part 56 are fitted with the joint part 43 of the inner lower brush part 31D in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall part 57 and the connecting wall part 58 are connected to the base part 41 in the circumferential direction.
- the inner lower brush portion 31D is removably coupled.
- the base portion 41 of the inner upper brush portion 31C is removably fitted into the fitting recess 61C from the outside.
- the base portion 41 of the inner lower brush portion 31E is removably fitted into the fitting recess 61E from the outside.
- the base portion 41 of the inner lower brush portion 31F is removably fitted into the fitting recess 61F from the outside.
- the outer support body 52 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from above.
- the outer support body 52 has an upper wall part 64 located at the upper end and extending along the circumferential direction, a lower wall part 65 located at the lower end and extending along the circumferential direction, and the upper wall part 64 and the lower wall part 65 in the meshing direction.
- an intermediate wall portion 66 located between and extending along the circumferential direction, and connecting wall portions 67, 68, 69 extending in the meshing direction and connecting the upper wall portion 64 and the lower wall portion 65 via the intermediate wall portion 66; 70, 52A.
- the upper wall portion 64, the lower wall portion 65, and the intermediate wall portion 66 are arranged throughout the circumferential direction.
- the connecting wall portion 67 and the connecting wall portion 68 are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction.
- the connecting wall portion 69 and the connecting wall portion 70 are arranged on the outer side of the connecting wall portion 67 and the connecting wall portion 68 in the circumferential direction, respectively.
- the connecting wall portions 52A are formed at both ends in the circumferential direction.
- the intermediate wall portion 66 has the same position in the engagement direction as the intermediate wall portion 56.
- the outer support body 52 has fitting recesses 62A, 62B, 62C, 62D, and 62E located on the upper side and fitting recesses 62F, 62G, 62H, 62J, and 62K located on the lower side.
- the fitting recesses 62A, 62B, 62C, 62D, and 62E and the fitting recesses 62F, 62G, 62H, 62J, and 62K are recessed outward from the surface of the outer support 52 facing inward in the depth direction.
- the fitting recess 62B and the fitting recess 62D are line symmetrical in the left-right direction
- the fitting recess 62C and the fitting recess 62E are line symmetrical in the left-right direction.
- the description of the fitting recess 62E may be omitted or simplified in some cases.
- the fitting recesses 62F, 62G, 62H, 62J, and 62K are line symmetrical with the fitting recesses 62A, 62B, 62C, 62D, and 62E in the meshing direction
- the fitting recesses 62F, 62G, 62H, 62J, 62K may be omitted or simplified in some cases.
- the base portion 71 of the outer upper brush portion 32A is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62A from the inside.
- the upper wall part 64 and the intermediate wall part 66 are fitted with the joint part 73 of the outer upper brush part 32A in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall part 67 and the connecting wall part 68 are connected to the base part 71 in the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 32A is removably coupled.
- the base portion 71 of the outer upper brush portion 32B is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62B from the inside.
- the upper wall part 64 and the intermediate wall part 66 fit into the joint part 73 of the outer upper brush part 32B in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall part 67 and the connecting wall part 69 fit into the base part 71 in the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 32B is removably coupled.
- the base portion 71 of the outer upper brush portion 32C is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62C from the inside.
- the upper wall 64 and the intermediate wall 66 are fitted in the coupling direction of the outer upper brush part 32C, and the connecting wall 69 and the connecting wall 52A are connected to the base 71 in the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 32C is removably coupled.
- the base portion 71 of the outer lower brush portion 32F is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62F from the inside.
- the lower wall part 65 and the intermediate wall part 66 fit into the joint part 73 of the outer lower brush part 32F in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall part 67 and the connecting wall part 68 fit into the base part 71 in the circumferential direction.
- the outer lower brush portion 32F is removably coupled.
- the base portion 71 of the outer upper brush portion 32D is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62D from the inside.
- the base portion 71 of the outer upper brush portion 32E is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62E from the inside.
- the base portion 71 of the outer lower brush portion 32G is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62G from the inside.
- the base portion 71 of the outer lower brush portion 32H is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62H from the inside.
- the base portion 71 of the outer lower brush portion 32J is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62J from the inside.
- the base portion 71 of the outer lower brush portion 32K is removably fitted into the fitting recess 62K from the inside.
- the thickness of the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 in the depth direction is preferably 1.5 mm or more and 6 mm or less.
- the base parts 41 and 71 are stably fixed to the inner support 51 and the outer support 52. Since the thickness is sufficient and the volume is not excessively large, it also contributes to preventing drooling and improving operability.
- the thickness of the inner support body 51 and the outer support body 52 in the depth direction is the fitting recesses 61A, 61B, 61C, 61D, 61E, 61F and the fitting recesses 62A, 62B, 62C, 62D, 62E, 62F, 62G. , 62H, 62J, and 62K are the thicknesses at positions where they are not provided.
- the connecting portion 53 connects the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 in the depth direction.
- the connecting portion 53 connects the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 at both ends in the circumferential direction.
- the connecting portion 53 of this embodiment constitutes a support body 50 as a second molded body integrally molded with the inner support body 51 and the outer support body 52. Note that the connecting portion 53 is manufactured separately from the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 without being integrally molded, and is connected to the support 50 with adhesive or the like in the same manner as the brush portion 30. It may be a fixed configuration.
- the connecting portion 53 includes a connecting plate 53A and a filament 53B.
- the connecting plate 53A has a plate shape that is perpendicular to the meshing direction, and extends to the lower end in the circumferential direction.
- the inner end of the connecting plate 53A is connected to the intermediate wall 56 of the inner support 51.
- the outer end of the connecting plate 53A is connected to the intermediate wall 66 of the outer support 52.
- the filaments 53B protrude and extend in the meshing direction from the upper and lower surfaces of the connecting plate 53A, respectively.
- the filament 53B has a mountain-shaped hair length profile with a peak at the midpoint in the depth direction. Since the filament 53B has a chevron-shaped bristle length profile, it has a profile that fits the meshing surfaces of the teeth, improving cleaning power.
- the filament 53B is placed, for example, at a position facing the back teeth. Since the filament 53B is arranged at a position facing the back teeth and protrudes upward and downward, it is possible to effectively clean the engagement surfaces of the back teeth that are difficult to reach with the brush portion 30.
- the support body 50 is a second molded body in which the inner support body 51, the outer support body 52, and the connecting portion 53 are integrally molded. Since the support body 50 is a second molded body molded as a separate member from the brush part 30, which is the first molded body, it is not restricted by the brush part 30, and the ease of spreading of the support body 50 can be controlled not to be too tight but to be loose. It can be made into something moderate. Therefore, the fit of the support body 50 to the tooth row is improved.
- the support body 50 is a second molded body integrally molded with a resin having a hardness harder than that of the brush part 30. Since the support body 50 is harder than the brush portion 30, the shape of the support body 50 can be stabilized, and it can tightly fit the tooth row and ensure cleaning power. Moreover, since the support body 50 is harder than the brush part 30, the brush part 30 can be firmly fixed. Further, when the mouthpiece section 20 is electric, vibrations are also easily transmitted.
- the resin constituting the support body 50 examples include soft resins having a Shore A hardness of 75 or more and a Shore D hardness of 75 or less.
- the hardness of the support body 50 is lower than the above-mentioned lower limit, the shape of the support body 50 cannot be stabilized, and the fit to the dentition and the cleaning power are also reduced. Furthermore, vibrations are difficult to transmit, and it is also difficult to fix the brush portion 30. Furthermore, when the mouthpiece section 20 is electrically operated, vibrations are also difficult to be transmitted. If the hardness of the support body 50 is higher than the above upper limit, the ability to follow the tooth arrangement during brushing will be impaired. Moreover, it becomes difficult to take the support body 50 in and out of the oral cavity. It is preferable that the support body 50 has a Shore A hardness higher than that of the brush portion 30 by 5 or more. This can enhance the above effects.
- elastomers can be used as the soft resin constituting the support 50, including the above-mentioned polyurethane and silicone.
- the spaced apart region preferably exists at 20% or more, more preferably at least 30%.
- the spaced apart region preferably exists at 70% or less, and more preferably at 60% or less.
- the upper limit value and the lower limit value of the spaced apart areas can be arbitrarily combined. If the spaced apart region is within the above range, the shape of the support body 50 can be stabilized, and it can fit securely to the dentition and ensure cleaning power.
- the location where the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 are connected is preferably at the center in the circumferential direction or at the occlusal surface of the back teeth.
- the method for manufacturing the toothbrush 1 having the above configuration includes a gripping part 10 and a mouthpiece part 20 connected to the gripping part 10, and the mouthpiece part 20 includes a brush part 30, which is a first molded body, and a first molded body.
- the base parts 41, 71 of the toothbrush 1 include a support body 50 that is a second molded body different from the first molded body and supports the brush part 30 along the circumferential direction centered on the axis J extending in the meshing direction.
- Preparing the brush part 30 includes molding the inner upper brush parts 31A, 31B, 31C and the inner lower brush parts 31D, 31E, 31F, which constitute the inner brush part 31, by injection molding or the like.
- Preparing the brush portion 30 also involves injecting the outer upper brush portions 32A, 32B, 32C, 32D, and 32E and the outer lower brush portions 32F, 32G, 32H, 32J, and 32K that constitute the outer brush portion 32, respectively. Including forming by molding etc.
- Preparing the support body 50 includes integrally molding the inner support body 51, the outer support body 52, and the connecting portion 53 by injection molding or the like.
- preparing the support 50 means molding the inner support 51, the outer support 52, the connecting part 53, and the shaft 14 by injection molding or the like. including.
- preparing the support 50 involves This includes integrally molding the support body 52 and the connecting portion 53 by injection molding or the like, and fixing the shaft 14.
- Coupling the brush portion 30 to the support body 50 means connecting the base portions 41 and 71 of each prepared brush portion 30 to the fitting recesses 61A, 61B, and 61C in the inner support body 51 of the prepared support body 50. Fitting and coupling into the fitting recesses 61D, 61E, 61F, and fitting into the fitting recesses 62A, 62B, 62C, 62D, 62E and the fitting recesses 62F, 62G, 62H, 62J, 62K in the outer support body 52. and combining.
- the mouthpiece part 20 in which the brush part 30 is arranged in a U-shape along the circumferential direction, as shown in FIG. 1, is manufactured.
- FIG. 10 is a side view showing a modification of the coupling portion.
- the brush portion 30 may have a configuration in which the base portions 41, 71 have shaft-shaped coupling portions 43A, 73A on the surfaces thereof facing the support body 50. When adopting this configuration, it is sufficient to provide a recessed portion in the support body 50 into which the coupling portions 43A and 73A are inserted and fitted.
- the peripheral edges of the base parts 41, 71 are made into curved joint parts 43B, 73B, and a recess 63 is formed in the support body 50 to wrap around the joint parts 43B, 73B from the outer peripheral side of the base parts 41, 71.
- a roll-in type coupling method may also be used.
- the mechanical connection between the brush portion 30 and the support body 50 may be a claw method such as a snap fit, or a screw method.
- the support body 50 may be bonded by a reduced pressure adsorption method using a suction cup or suction, a thermal adhesive bonding method such as thermal welding using a heater or ultrasonic waves, an external force method using the adsorption force of a magnet, etc.
- the brush portion 30 and the support body 50 may be bonded to each other by chemical bonding using contraction action, van der Waals force, or static electricity.
- the toothbrush 1 is manufactured by connecting the shaft 14 of the manufactured mouthpiece part 20 to the grip part 10.
- the brush part 30 is the first molded body and the support body 50 is the second molded body, so each can have an optimal shape without being constrained by the other. , material specifications, etc. Therefore, with the toothbrush 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve sufficient cleaning performance for each site in the oral cavity and a high fit of the support body 50 to the tooth row.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic plan view of the mouthpiece section 20 viewed from above.
- a configuration in which a plurality of inner brush portions 31 and a plurality of outer brush portions 32 are provided is illustrated.
- a single inner brush part 31 having the entire circumferential length is coupled to the inner support 51, and a single outer brush part 31 having the entire circumferential length. 32 is coupled to outer support 52.
- the inner brush portion 31 and the outer brush portion 32 may be formed along the curves of the inner support 51 and the outer support 52, respectively, or may be formed into a planar shape. When the inner brush part 31 and the outer brush part 32 are formed into a planar shape, they may be curved along the curves of the inner support body 51 and the outer support body 52 and fitted into the fitting recesses to be coupled.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment.
- the number of parts is reduced, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and facilitating the joining work.
- FIGS. 13 and 14 a third embodiment of the mouthpiece section 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14.
- the same elements as those of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 11 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.
- FIG. 13 is a plan view of the mouthpiece section 20 schematically viewed from above.
- the mouthpiece portion 20 of this embodiment includes an elastic member 81 that elastically deforms the inner support body 51 to curve it along the circumferential direction, and an elastic member 82 that elastically deforms the outer support body 52 and curves it along the circumferential direction. and has.
- the elastic members 81 and 82 are formed of leaf springs, wires, etc. that curve and extend along the circumferential direction.
- the elastic members 81 and 82 have higher hardness than the inner brush portion 31 and the outer brush portion 32 forming the brush portion 30 and the inner support body 51 and the outer support body 52 forming the support body 50.
- the material of the elastic members 81 and 82 is preferably, for example, silicone, urethane, acrylic, copper plate, stainless steel, etc., and materials other than stainless steel are more preferable in terms of adhesiveness and recycling. Also, by using the above materials, strength and appropriate tension can be obtained.
- the circumferential length of the elastic members 81 and 82 may be the same as the circumferential length of the inner support 51 and the outer support 52, or may be the length of the curved area of the inner support 51 and the outer support 52. good.
- the elastic member 81 is mounted inside the inner support body 51.
- the elastic member 82 is attached to the outside of the outer support 52 .
- the exposed surfaces of the elastic members 81 and 82 are preferably coated with silicone. Since the surfaces of the elastic members 81 and 82 are not exposed, no discomfort or discomfort is caused.
- FIG. 14 is a side view schematically showing the mouthpiece section 20 before the elastic members 81 and 82 are attached.
- the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 are formed into a planar shape.
- Inner brush portion 31 and outer brush portion 32 are coupled to planar inner support 51 and outer support 52, respectively. Since the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 are molded into a planar shape, the structure of the mold for molding can be simplified, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and the joining operation can be facilitated.
- the inner support body 51 to which the inner brush portion 31 is coupled is elastically deformed by the elastic force when the elastic member 81 is attached, and curves along the circumferential direction.
- the curved inner support body 51 improves its fit to the lingual tooth row and its cleaning power by applying outward tension.
- the outer support body 52 to which the outer brush portion 32 is coupled is elastically deformed and curved along the circumferential direction by the elastic force when the elastic member 82 is attached.
- the curved outer support body 52 improves its fit to the buccal dentition and its cleaning power by applying inward tension.
- the U-shapes and angles of the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 are not linked, but the curved shapes are individually adjusted. can. Therefore, in this embodiment, the angle of the U-shape corresponding to the row of teeth and each part of the teeth is set, so that specifications suitable for oral cavity cleaning can be made for each part, and each part in the oral cavity can be sufficiently cleaned. In addition, it is possible to improve the fit to the dentition.
- the thickness of the elastic members 81 and 82 is preferably 0.5 mm or more and 3.0 mm or less.
- the elastic members 81 and 82 have sufficient strength when the thickness is above the lower limit, and have a compact volume when the thickness is below the upper limit, so that the above effects can be obtained while ensuring operability.
- FIGS. 15 and 16 a fifth embodiment of the mouthpiece section 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.
- the same elements as those of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 12 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.
- FIG. 15 is a plan view of the mouthpiece section 20 schematically viewed from above.
- the mouthpiece section 20 of this embodiment includes an elastic member 81 that elastically deforms the inner support 51 to curve it in the circumferential direction, and an elastic member 81 that elastically deforms the outer support 52 to curve it in the circumferential direction. It has an elastic member 82 that is curved along.
- FIG. 16 is a side view schematically showing the mouthpiece section 20 before the elastic members 81 and 82 are attached.
- the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 are formed into a planar shape.
- Inner brush portion 31 and outer brush portion 32 are coupled to planar inner support 51 and outer support 52, respectively.
- the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.
- the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 are formed into a planar shape, so that the mold structure for molding can be simplified. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs and facilitate the joining work.
- the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 are continuous in the circumferential direction, but the structure is not limited to this.
- the structure may be arranged in When adopting this configuration, for example, the connecting portion 53 is disposed entirely in the circumferential direction, the inner support 51 is intermittently arranged inside the connecting portion 53, and the outer support 52 is disposed outside the connecting portion 53. It is also possible to have a configuration in which they are arranged intermittently.
- the mouthpiece portion 20 may be provided in only one region between the left and right, and the connecting portion 53 may also be provided only in that region. good.
- a flat protrusion may be provided from at least one of the inner support 51 and the outer support 52 toward the other.
- the protrusion may connect the inner support 51 and the outer support 52. Providing the protrusion allows the meshing surfaces of the teeth to rub against each other, improving cleaning power.
- the thickness of the protrusion is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 mm.
- FIG. 17 is a front view of the toothbrush 101 of the second embodiment.
- the toothbrush 101 is a mouthpiece type toothbrush, and has a grip part 110 and a connecting body 120.
- the connecting body 120 will be referred to as the mouthpiece section 120.
- the connecting body 120 is subjected to vibration via the grip portion 110.
- a shaft 114 protrudes from the grip section 110 and is connected to a mouthpiece section 120. Note that the shaft 114 protruding from the mouthpiece section 120 may be connected to the grip section 110.
- the connecting body 120 is subjected to vibration from the grip portion 110 via the shaft 114.
- the present invention provides a configuration in which a gripping portion 110 manually applies a sweeping motion to the mouthpiece portion 120 in up and down, left and right, front and rear directions, and a combination thereof, a configuration in which vibration is manually applied, and a configuration in which a cleaning operation is manually applied to the mouthpiece portion 120 from the gripping portion 110. It is applicable to any configuration in which vibration is applied electrically to the piece portion 120.
- an electric drive unit is provided in the grip portion 110 and vibrations generated by driving the electric drive unit are applied to the coupling body 120.
- the electric drive unit includes a power supply section 111, a vibration element 112, and a control section 13.
- the control unit 13 drives the vibration element 112 using the power from the power supply unit 111.
- the power supply unit 111 includes, for example, a rechargeable battery, a battery, or the like.
- the vibration element 112 is composed of, for example, a piezoelectric element, an electromagnetic acoustic transducer, an unbalanced motor, or the like.
- the vibration generated by the vibration element 112 is a vibration in which the rotation direction is rotated around an axis extending in the depth direction, and the rotation direction is repeatedly reversed at a constant predetermined rotation angle.
- the shaft 114 connected to the electric drive unit in the grip portion 110 vibrates by repeatedly reversing its rotational direction.
- the mouthpiece portion 120 vibrates by repeatedly reversing the direction of rotation.
- the mouthpiece section 120 has a brush section 130 and a support body 150.
- FIG. 18 is a diagram of the brush section 130 in the mouthpiece section 120 viewed from above.
- the brush portions 130 are arranged apart from each other on the outer side and the inner side in the depth direction.
- the brush section 130 has an inner brush section 131 and an outer brush section 132.
- the inner brush portion 131 is located on the inner side in the depth direction.
- the inner brush section 131 has inner upper brush sections 131A, 131B, and 131C.
- the inner upper brush parts 131A, 131B, and 131C are located on the upper side and are arranged to face the tongue-side tooth surface of the maxillary tooth row along the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush parts 131A, 131B, and 131C are provided in a U-shape, with the inner upper brush part 131A being the center, and the inner upper brush parts 131B and 131C being spaced apart from each other on both sides in the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush part 131B and the inner upper brush part 131C are line symmetrical in the left-right direction, so a description of the inner upper brush part 131C may be omitted.
- the inner brush portion 131 has inner lower brush portions 131D, 131E, and 131F located on the lower side.
- the inner lower brush parts 131D, 131E, and 131F are line symmetrical with the inner upper brush parts 131A, 131B, and 131C in the meshing direction, and overlap with the inner upper brush parts 131A, 131B, and 131C, respectively when viewed from above, so that in FIG.
- the numbers for the inner lower brush parts 131D, 131E, and 131F are added in parentheses to the numbers for the inner upper brush parts 131A, 131B, and 131C.
- the inner lower brush parts 131D, 131E, and 131F are arranged to face the tongue-side tooth surface of the lower jaw-side tooth row along the circumferential direction.
- the lower inner brush parts 131D, 131E, and 131F are provided in a U-shape, with the lower inner brush part 131D being the center, and the lower inner brush parts 131E and 131F being spaced apart from each other on both sides in the circumferential direction.
- the inner lower brush parts 131D, 131E, and 131F are line symmetrical with the inner upper brush parts 131A, 131B, and 131C in the meshing direction, so the description of the inner lower brush parts 131D, 131E, and 131F will be omitted. There are cases.
- the inner upper brush portion 131A is arranged at the center position in the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush portion 131A has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in a direction convex to the outside when viewed from above. Both circumferential sides of the inner upper brush portion 131A are curved along the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush portion 131A is curved according to the curved shape of the support body 150.
- the inner upper brush portion 131A is mainly arranged to face the tongue-side tooth surfaces of the plurality of front teeth on the maxillary side. Therefore, a plurality of brush parts 130 are arranged in each of the circumferential direction, the meshing direction, and the depth direction.
- the number is preferably three or more and nine or less, and more preferably three or more and seven or less.
- the number is preferably one or more and four or less, and more preferably two or more and three or less.
- FIG. 19 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 17.
- the inner upper brush portion 131A includes a base portion 141, a bristle bundle 142, and a connecting portion 143.
- the base portion 141 has a rectangular cross section.
- FIG. 20 is a diagram of the inner upper brush portion 131A viewed from above.
- the base portion 141 has portions on both sides in the circumferential direction that are curved along the circumferential direction in a direction convex to the outside when viewed from above.
- This embodiment is a toothbrush 101 that uses brush parts 130 arranged along the row of teeth and is intended to be moved manually or electrically. can be placed along the lingual side of the dentition, improving cleaning and fitting properties. Furthermore, it is possible to maximize the installation area of the brush section 130, and in the case of electric power, it can contribute to improving vibration efficiency and cleaning power.
- the length of the base portion 141 in the circumferential direction is preferably 5 mm or more.
- the length of the base portion 141 in the circumferential direction is preferably shorter than the total length of the support body 150 in the circumferential direction (for example, 130 mm).
- the length L of the base portion 141 is defined as a straight line distance connecting both ends of the brush surface 141a in the circumferential direction.
- the length L of the base portion 141 is preferably 5 mm or more, more preferably 15 mm or more.
- the radius of curvature of the base portion 141 is preferably 3 mm or more and 80 mm or less.
- the base portion 141 is removably fitted into a fitting recess 161A (details will be described later) in the inner support body 151 from the outside.
- the base portion 141 is coupled to the inner support body 151 by fitting the upper and lower surfaces forming the coupling portion 143 into the fitting recess 161A.
- the inner upper brush portion 131A can be replaced with respect to the inner support 151. Therefore, the user can replace the brush part 130 and change the specifications according to his/her preference or situation, making it possible to meet a wide variety of needs.
- the thickness, which is the dimension in the depth direction of the base portion 141 is preferably 6 mm or less, and more preferably 4 mm or less.
- the thickness, which is the dimension in the depth direction of the base portion 141 is preferably 1 mm or more.
- the upper and lower limits of the thickness, which is the dimension in the depth direction of the base portion 141 can be arbitrarily combined.
- the thickness of the base portion 141 is excessively thin, the strength of the flocking will be reduced and vibration transmission will be weakened when used electrically.
- the width which is the dimension of the base portion 141 in the engagement direction, will be described later.
- the base portion 141 has a cut, a constriction, and a change in thickness.
- the long base portion 141 has cuts, constrictions, and thickness changes in the base portion 141 itself, thereby ensuring flexibility of the base portion 141 itself and providing a suitable sense of interlocking.
- the bristle bundle 142 extends outward from the outwardly facing brush surface 141a of the base portion 141.
- the brush surface 141a is inclined inward toward the top.
- a tufting hole 141b is formed in the brush surface 141a. If the position where the upper and lower teeth engage in the meshing direction is the meshing surface K, the tufting hole 141b extends at an angle with respect to the meshing surface K.
- the tufting holes 141b are inclined upward toward the outside.
- a plurality of tuft holes 141b (two in FIG. 19) are arranged at intervals in the meshing direction. Although not shown, a plurality of tuft holes 141b are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction. Therefore, a plurality of rows (two rows in FIG. 19) of the tuft holes 141b arranged in the circumferential direction are arranged in the meshing direction.
- the hair bundle 142 is implanted in the tuft hole 141b.
- the method of planting the hair bundle 142 includes a flat wire method in which the bundle of hair is folded in half and a flat wire inserted between the two is driven into the implant hole 141b, a welding method that includes heating and ultrasonic waves, and a welding method that involves heating and ultrasonic waves. This is done by using a piece that is sandwiched and fixed as the base part 141, or by fixing it to the base part 141 and using it as the brush part 130.
- the brush portion 130 can be manufactured with ultra-high density, so that the stiffness of the hair can be ensured and cleaning performance can be improved.
- the feeling of cleaning can be improved.
- arrangement and post-processing are easier compared to when the hair bundles 142 are directly planted on the support 150, so cleaning performance is improved. can.
- the hair bundles 142 can be applied along the tooth row on the tongue side, and cleaning performance can be further improved.
- the bristle bundles 142 planted in the bristle holes 141b in the inner upper brush portion 131A extend upwardly toward the outside. Therefore, in a hair bundle row in which a plurality of hair bundles 142 are arranged in the circumferential direction, the tip portion of the hair is inclined toward the upper end of the base portion 141 with respect to the root portion.
- the tips of the bristle bundles 142 in the bristle bundle row located at the upper end protrude above the upper surface of the base portion 141 . This makes it possible to clean a wide range in the occlusal direction, and it is possible to thoroughly clean the gums and the like on the lingual side located far from the occlusal surface K.
- the arrangement pitch of the circumferential bristle bundles 142 in adjacent bristle bundle rows in the interlocking direction is preferably shifted by, for example, a half pitch.
- the bristle bundles 142 in a staggered manner when viewed in the direction facing the brush surface 141a, the gap between the bristle bundles 142 can be reduced, and the fit to the tooth surface on the tongue side and the cleaning performance can be improved. You can improve.
- the bristle bundles 142 protrude and extend radially outward from the brush surface 141a.
- the inner upper brush part 131A constituting the brush part 130 has a part where the arrangement pitch of the root part and the arrangement pitch of the tip part of the bristle bundle 142 are different at the part where the base part 141 is curved.
- the arrangement pitch P2 of the tip portions of the hair bundle 142 is larger than the arrangement pitch P1 of the root portions.
- the bristles 142 can be applied so as to cover all the teeth from both the front and back sides, improving the experience of cleaning.
- the arrangement pitch P2 of the tip part is larger than the arrangement pitch P1 of the root part in the part where the base part 141 is curved.
- the inner upper brush portion 131B is located on the right side in the circumferential direction than the inner upper brush portion 131A, and extends to the end in the circumferential direction.
- the end portion of the inner upper brush portion 131B closer to the inner upper brush portion 131A has a shape that is an extension of the curved shape of the inner upper brush portion 131A.
- the ⁇ side of the inner upper brush portion 131B has a linear shape that is tangent to the curved shape.
- the inner upper brush portion 131B is mainly arranged to face the tongue-side tooth surfaces of the maxillary canine teeth and back teeth (premolars, molars).
- the base portion 141 of the inner lower brush portion 131D is removably fitted into a fitting recess 61D (details will be described later) in the inner support body 151 from the outside.
- the base portion 141 is coupled to the inner support body 151 by fitting the upper and lower surfaces forming the coupling portion 143 into the fitting recess 61D.
- the inner lower brush portion 131D can be replaced with respect to the inner support 151. Therefore, the user can replace the brush part 130 and change the specifications according to his/her preference or situation, making it possible to meet a wide variety of needs.
- the inner lower brush portion 131D is vertically symmetrical with respect to the inner upper brush portion 131A in the engagement direction with the engagement surface K as the center.
- the bristle bundle 142 in the inner lower brush portion 131D extends outward from the brush surface 141a.
- the brush surface 141a is inclined inward toward the bottom.
- the tufting hole 141b extends obliquely with respect to the engagement surface K.
- the tufting holes 141b are inclined downward toward the outside.
- the bristle bundles 142 planted in the bristle holes 141b of the inner lower brush portion 131D extend in a downward direction toward the outside. Therefore, in a hair bundle row in which a plurality of hair bundles 142 are arranged in the circumferential direction, the tip portion of the hair is inclined toward the lower end of the base portion 71 with respect to the root portion.
- the tips of the bristle bundles 142 in the bristle bundle row located at the lower end protrude below the lower surface of the base portion 141 .
- the outer brush portion 132 is located on the outer side in the depth direction.
- the outer brush section 132 has outer upper brush sections 132A, 132B, 132C, 132D, and 132E.
- the outer upper brush parts 132A, 132B, 132C, 132D, and 132E are located on the upper side and are arranged to face the buccal tooth surface of the maxillary tooth row along the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush parts 132A, 132B, 132C, 132D, and 132E are arranged such that the outer upper brush parts 132B and 132C are sequentially arranged at intervals on the right side in the circumferential direction with the outer upper brush part 132A in the center.
- 132E are sequentially arranged at intervals on the left side in the circumferential direction, and are provided in a U-shape as a whole.
- the outer upper brush part 132B and the outer upper brush part 132D are line symmetrical in the left-right direction
- the outer upper brush part 132C and the outer upper brush part 132E are line symmetrical in the left-right direction.
- a description of the upper brush parts 132D and 132E may be omitted in some cases.
- the outer brush portion 132 includes outer lower brush portions 132F, 132G, 132H, 132J, and 132K.
- the outer lower brush portions 132F, 132G, 132H, 132J, and 132K are line symmetrical with the outer upper brush portions 132A, 132B, 132C, 132D, and 132E in the meshing direction, and are viewed from above. , 132D, and 132E, so in FIG. 18, the symbols for the lower outer brush portions 132F, 132G, 132H, 132J, and 132K are written in parentheses after the symbols for the upper outer brush portions 132A, 132B, 132C, 132D, and 132E. It is added in.
- the outer lower brush parts 132F, 132G, 132H, 132J, and 132K are arranged to face the buccal tooth surface of the lower jaw row of teeth along the circumferential direction.
- the outer lower brush parts 132F, 132G, 132H, 132J, and 132K are arranged with the outer lower brush part 132F in the center, and the outer lower brush parts 132G and 132H are sequentially arranged at intervals on the right side in the circumferential direction.
- 132K are sequentially arranged at intervals on the left side in the circumferential direction, and are provided in a U-shape as a whole.
- the lower outer brush parts 132F, 132G, 132H, 132J, and 132K are line symmetrical with the upper outer brush parts 132A, 132B, 132C, 132D, and 132E in the meshing direction, so the lower outer brush parts 132F, 132G, 132H, and 132J , 132K may be omitted.
- the outer upper brush portion 132A is arranged at the center position in the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 132A has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in a direction convex to the outside when viewed from above. Both circumferential sides of the outer upper brush portion 132A are curved along the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 132A is mainly arranged to face the buccal tooth surfaces of the plurality of front teeth on the maxillary side.
- the outer upper brush portion 132A includes a base portion 171, a bristle bundle 172, and a connecting portion 173.
- the base portion 171 has a rectangular cross section.
- FIG. 21 is a view of the outer upper brush portion 132A viewed from above.
- the base portion 171 has portions on both sides in the circumferential direction that are curved along the circumferential direction in a direction convex to the outside when viewed from above.
- the bristle bundle 172 can be made to follow the lingual side of the tooth row, and cleaning performance and fitting performance can be improved. Additionally, it is possible to maximize the installation area, contributing to improvements in vibration efficiency and cleaning power.
- the radius of curvature of the base portion 171 is preferably 10 mm or more and 80 mm or less.
- the base portion 171 is removably fitted into a fitting recess 162A (details will be described later) in the outer support body 152 from the inside.
- the base portion 171 is coupled to the outer support body 152 by fitting the upper and lower surfaces forming the coupling portion 173 into the fitting recess 162A.
- the outer upper brush portion 132A can be replaced with respect to the outer support body 152.
- the bristle bundle 172 extends inward from the inwardly facing brush surface 171a of the base portion 171.
- the brush surface 171a of the outer upper brush portion 132A is inclined outward toward the upper side.
- a tufting hole 171b is formed in the brush surface 171a.
- the tufting hole 171b extends obliquely with respect to the engagement surface K.
- the tufting hole 171b is inclined upward as it goes inward.
- a plurality of tuft holes 171b (three in FIG. 19) are arranged at intervals in the meshing direction. Although not shown, a plurality of tuft holes 171b are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction. Therefore, a plurality of rows (three rows in FIG. 19) of the tuft holes 141b arranged in the circumferential direction are arranged in the meshing direction.
- the hair bundle 172 is planted in the tuft hole 171b.
- the method of planting the hair bundle 172 is the same as that of the hair bundle 142 described above. Since the bristles 172 are formed of bristles, the feeling of cleaning can be improved.
- the hair bundles 172 can be applied along the row of teeth on the buccal side, and cleaning performance can be further improved.
- the bristle bundles 172 planted in the bristle holes 171b in the outer upper brush portion 132A extend in an upward direction toward the inside. Therefore, in a hair bundle row in which a plurality of hair bundles 172 are arranged in the circumferential direction, the tip portion is inclined toward the upper end of the base portion 171 with respect to the root portion. Among the rows of hair bundles arranged in the interlocking direction, the tips of the hair bundles 142 in the row of hair bundles located at the upper end protrude above the upper surface of the base portion 171 . This makes it possible to clean a wide range in the occlusal direction, and it is possible to thoroughly clean the gums on the buccal side, which are located far from the occlusal surface K.
- the arrangement pitch of the circumferential bristle bundles 172 in adjacent bristle bundle rows in the meshing direction is shifted by, for example, a half pitch.
- the bristle bundles 172 in a staggered manner when viewed in the direction facing the brush surface 171a, the gap between the bristle bundles 172 can be reduced, and the fit to the buccal tooth surface and the cleaning performance can be improved. You can improve.
- the bristle bundles 172 protrude and extend radially inward from the brush surface 171a.
- the outer upper brush part 132A constituting the brush part 130 has a part where the arrangement pitch of the root part and the arrangement pitch of the tip part of the bristle bundle 172 are different at the part where the base part 171 is curved. .
- the arrangement pitch P4 of the tips of the hair in the hair bundle 172 is smaller than the arrangement pitch P3 of the roots.
- the bristles 172 can be applied so as to cover all the teeth from both the front and back sides, improving the experience of cleaning.
- the arrangement pitch of the bristle bundles 172 in the brush portion 130 is different between the tip portion and the root portion
- the arrangement pitch first The pitch of the bristle bundles in the second brush part and the pitch of the bristle bundles in the second brush part may be different between the tips and roots of the bristles.
- the tufting angle of the bristle bundles 172 is adjusted to arrange the hair at the tip and root portions. Adjusting the pitch improves the feeling of cleaning and the cleaning performance.
- the arrangement pitch P4 of the tip part is smaller than the arrangement pitch P3 of the root part in the part where the base part 171 is curved.
- the outer upper brush portion 132B is located on the right side in the circumferential direction than the outer upper brush portion 132A.
- the upper outer brush portion 132C is located on the right side in the circumferential direction than the upper outer brush portion 132B.
- the circumferential end of the outer upper brush portion 132C on the side (+ ⁇ side) closer to the outer upper brush portion 132B has a shape that is an extension of the curved shape of the outer upper brush portion 132A.
- the ⁇ side of the outer upper brush portion 132C has a linear shape that is tangent to the curved shape.
- the outer upper brush portion 132C is mainly arranged to face the buccal tooth surfaces of a plurality of back teeth (premolars, molars) on the maxillary side.
- the outer upper brush portion 132B When viewed from above, the outer upper brush portion 132B has a linear shape connecting the ⁇ side end of the outer upper brush portion 132A and the + ⁇ side end of the outer upper brush portion 132C.
- the outer upper brush portion 132B has a short circumferential dimension and is formed in a straight line shape because the advantage of curving it is reduced.
- the base portion 171 of the outer lower brush portion 132F is removably fitted into a fitting recess 162F (details will be described later) in the outer support body 152 from the inside.
- the base portion 171 is coupled to the outer support body 152 by fitting the upper and lower surfaces forming the coupling portion 173 into the fitting recess 162F.
- the outer lower brush portion 132F can be replaced with respect to the outer support body 152.
- the outer lower brush portion 132F is vertically symmetrical with respect to the outer upper brush portion 132A in the engagement direction with the engagement surface K as the center.
- the bristle bundle 172 in the outer lower brush portion 132F extends inward from the brush surface 171a.
- the brush surface 171a is inclined outward toward the bottom.
- the tufting hole 171b extends obliquely with respect to the engagement surface K.
- the tufting hole 171b is inclined downward as it goes inward.
- the bristle bundles 172 planted in the bristle holes 171b of the outer lower brush portion 132F extend inwardly at an angle downward. Therefore, in a hair bundle row in which a plurality of hair bundles 172 are arranged in the circumferential direction, the tip portion is inclined toward the lower end of the base portion 171 with respect to the root portion. Among the rows of hair bundles lined up in the interlocking direction, the tips of the hair bundles 172 in the row of hair bundles located at the lower end protrude below the lower surface of the base portion 171 . As a result, it is possible to clean a wide range in the direction of engagement, and the gums and the like located far from the engagement surface K can be thoroughly cleaned.
- the method of planting the hair bundle 172 is the same as the method of planting the hair bundle 142.
- the distance between the bristles which is the shortest distance between the bristle bundle 142 of the inner brush part 131 and the bristle bundle 172 of the outer brush part 132 described above, differs depending on the position in the circumferential direction.
- the outer brush portion 132 and the inner brush portion 131 each have a central region including the circumferential center of the support 150 and an end region located at the circumferential end of the support 150.
- An intermediate region is provided between the central region and the end regions.
- the central region is the region that primarily faces the front teeth.
- the end region is mainly the region facing the premolars to the molars.
- the intermediate region is mainly the region facing from the canine to the premolar. As shown in FIG.
- the central region is a first region A1, the middle region is a second region A2, and the end region is a third region A3.
- the central region is defined as a first region B1
- the intermediate region is defined as a second region B2
- the end region is defined as a third region B3.
- the distance between the tips of the hair between the first area A1 and the first area B1 is set as D1
- the distance between the tips of the hair between the second area A2 and the second area B2 is set as D2
- the distance between the tips of the hair between the second area A2 and the second area B2 is set as D1.
- Let the distance between the tips of the hair be D3.
- the inter-bristle distance D1 is the distance between the shortest hair bundle 172 of the outer brush portion 132 in the first region A1 and the shortest hair bundle 142 of the inner brush portion 131 in the first region B1. .
- the inter-bristle distance D2 is the distance between the shortest hair bundle 172 of the outer brush portion 132 in the second region A2 and the shortest hair bundle 142 of the inner brush portion 131 in the second region B2.
- the inter-bristle distance D3 is the distance between the shortest hair bundle of the outer brush portion 132 in the third region A3 and the shortest hair bundle 142 of the inner brush portion 131 in the third region B3.
- the shortest distance between the bristles is the distance between the inner and outer bristles in the depth direction, which are on the same plane perpendicular to the circumferential direction (i.e., a plane extending in the depth direction) with the inner support 151 as a reference.
- This value is measured as the distance between the tips of the shortest hairs.
- the distance between the bristles is a value measured when viewed in the interlocking direction (for example, from above). In other words, the two bristles measured as the distance between the bristles may be at different positions in the interlocking direction.
- the plane is a virtual space with a thickness of ⁇ 0.5 mm in the circumferential direction, and the hairs are When it enters space, it is assumed that it lies on the same plane. In other words, it is assumed that the shortest hairs in the depth direction are on the same plane if the distance in the circumferential direction is within 1.0 mm.
- the distances D1 and D3 between the bristles satisfy the relationship D3>D1.
- the distance D3 between the bristles in the area that mainly faces the back teeth including premolars and molars is larger than the distance D1 between the bristles in the area that mainly faces the front teeth.
- Front teeth are thin, so the distance between the teeth is small, and back teeth are thick, so the distance between the teeth is large.
- the hair will fit better to the dentition. Cleaning power can be improved. It is preferable that the distances between the hair tips D1, D2, and D3 satisfy the relationship D3>D2>D1. That is, the gap in the depth direction between the outer brush part 132 and the inner brush part 131 is larger in the second area A2, B2 than in the first area A1, B1, and in the third area A3, B3 than in the second area A2, B2. big.
- the area from the circumferential center to 40% is the first area A1, B1, and the area from 40% to 65%. If 65% to 100% are the second regions A2 and B2, and 65% to 100% are the third regions A3 and B3, it is preferable that the distances between the hair tips D1, D2, and D3 satisfy the relationship D1 ⁇ D2 ⁇ D3.
- the vibration is due to the rotational movement of the shaft 114, and the amplitude becomes large in the third regions A3 and B3 where the radius of rotation around the shaft 114 is large.
- this vibration characteristic it becomes possible to provide an optimal space (range of motion) between the bristles, improving the cleaning experience and cleaning performance.
- the distance D1 between the tips of the hair is preferably 0.5 to 4.0 mm.
- the distance D2 between the tips of the hair is preferably 2.0 to 9.0 mm.
- the distance D3 between the tips of the hair is preferably 4.0 to 12.0 mm.
- the length of the base portion 171 in the outer brush portion 132 located in the first region A1 in the engaging direction is set as WA1.
- the length of the base portion 171 in the outer brush portion 132 located in the second region A2 in the engaging direction is set as WA2.
- the length of the base portion 171 in the outer brush portion 132 located in the third region A3 in the engaging direction is set as WA3.
- the length in the engagement direction of the base portion 141 of the inner brush portion 131 located in the first region B1 is assumed to be WB1.
- the length in the engagement direction of the base portion 141 of the inner brush portion 131 located in the second region B2 is defined as WB2.
- the length in the engagement direction of the base portion 141 of the inner brush portion 131 located in the third region B3 is set as WB3. It is preferable that the relationships WA1>WA2>WA3 and WB1>WB2>WB3 are satisfied.
- the back teeth are thicker in the depth direction than the front teeth, and the space in the oral cavity around the back teeth is limited. This can reduce the feeling of pressure in the oral cavity and the risk of reflex vomiting. Therefore, the feeling of cleaning and the cleaning performance are improved.
- the relationship between the lengths of the outer brush portion 132 and the inner brush portion 131 in the meshing direction is preferably WA1>WB1, WA2>WB2, and WA3>WB3.
- the length WA1 is preferably 5 to 10 mm.
- the length WA2 is preferably 4 to 9 mm.
- the length WA3 is preferably 2 to 9 mm.
- the length WB1 is preferably 4 to 9 mm.
- the length WB2 is preferably 3 to 8 mm.
- the length WB3 is preferably 2 to 8 mm.
- the length of the base portion 141 and the base portion 171 in the meshing direction is preferably 25 mm or less. By setting the length in the engagement direction to 25 mm or less, the outer brush portion 132 and the inner brush portion 131 do not become too large, and discomfort in the oral cavity can be reduced.
- the length of the base portion 141 and the base portion 171 in the occlusal direction is preferably 50 mm or less in total for the base portions 141 and 171 of the upper jaw and the lower jaw, and when the upper jaw and the lower jaw are separated, the length of the upper jaw (lower jaw) is 25 mm. The following is preferable.
- the brush surfaces 141a, 171a are perpendicular to the depth direction, and the bristle holes 141b, 171b are located on the brush surfaces 141a, 171a. If the brush surfaces 141a, 171a are arranged to extend in the normal direction, the brush surfaces 141a, 171a will be elongated in the meshing direction, and the base portions 141, 171 will be enlarged, thereby reducing usability.
- the brush surfaces 141a, 171a are perpendicular to the depth direction, and the bristle holes 141b, 171b are inclined with respect to the normal direction of the brush surfaces 141a, 171a, so that the bristle bundle can be adjusted according to the inclination angle of the bristle holes 141b, 171b.
- the bristles 142 and 172 are located away from the engagement surface K. In this case, the maximum dimension of the tuft holes 141b, 171b on the brush surfaces 141a, 171a is larger than the diameter of the tuft holes 141b, 171b.
- the maximum dimension of the bristle holes 141b, 171b on the brush surfaces 141a, 171a S has a value expressed by d/cos( ⁇ 1), which is larger than the diameter d.
- a minimum thickness is specified to ensure strength, so the tufting holes 141b, 171b are inclined with respect to the normal direction of the brush surfaces 141a, 171a.
- the normal direction of the brush surfaces 141a, 171a is inclined with respect to the depth direction, and the bristle planting holes 141b, 171b are also inclined with respect to the normal direction of the brush surfaces 141a, 171a.
- the angle ⁇ 1 becomes smaller, the maximum dimension S becomes smaller.
- the positions of the tips of the bristles 142, 172 are adjusted to the interlocking surface K. It becomes possible to set the position away from the
- a mixture of one or more types of hair may be used.
- two or more types of bristles may be used within the same brush portion 130 or within the same area. Cleaning performance can be improved by using a bristle type suitable for polishing each area.
- the brush portion 130 is removable, it is possible to replace the brush portion 130 with a type of bristles that suits the user's preference, thereby improving the cleaning experience and cleaning performance.
- the hair diameter in the first regions A1 and B1 is preferably 3 to 6 mil.
- the hair diameter in the second regions A2 and B2 is preferably 3 to 5 mil.
- the hair diameter in the third regions A3 and B3 is preferably 4 to 8 mil. Cleanability can be improved by using a bristle diameter suitable for polishing each area. Furthermore, since the brush portion 130 can be designed to have the hardness desired by the user, cleaning performance can be improved.
- the number of bristles is planted such that the first area A1>second area A2>third area A3 is satisfied. Further, the number of bristles is planted such that the first region B1>second region B2>third region B3 is satisfied.
- the first region A1 and the first region B1 where the area of the tooth surface is relatively large, by implanting many bristles, a structure is created in which the bristles come into contact with the entire tooth surface, improving the feeling of cleaning and cleaning performance. do.
- the feeling of pressure caused by the bristles coming into contact with the gums and oral mucosa in the narrowed oral cavity on the molar side can be reduced, and Reflex vomiting can be suppressed, and the feeling of cleaning can be improved.
- the number of bristles in the first region A1 is preferably 150 to 500.
- the number of bristles in the second region A2 is preferably 150 to 500.
- the number of bristles in the third region A3 is preferably 70 to 250.
- the number of bristles in the first region B1 is preferably 100 to 500.
- the number of bristles in the second region B2 is preferably 100 to 500.
- the number of bristles in the third region B3 is preferably 50 to 250. If the number of bristles in each region is less than the above-mentioned preferred range, the brush portion 130 will feel sparse and the cleaning experience will be reduced.
- the number of bristles is larger than the above-mentioned preferable range, the brush portion 130 becomes overcrowded, and when the mouthpiece portion 120 is moved, the bristles 142 and 172 cannot be bent appropriately, and the mouthpiece portion 120 This prevents smooth movement.
- the bristles 142, 172 are appropriately bent and the cleaning experience can be improved.
- the number of bristles mentioned above is merely an example, and may exceed the upper limit.
- the number of holes is in the range of 4,000 to 200,000.
- the hair with the longest hair length planted in the third area A3 may be longer than the hair with the longest hair length planted in the first area A1 and the second area A2, partially or on the entire surface.
- the hair with the longest hair length planted in the third region B3 may be longer than the hair with the longest hair length planted in the first region B1 and the second region B2, partially or on the entire surface. preferable.
- hairs having a longest hair length of 2 to 7 mm are implanted in a single hair length or in a plurality of hair lengths.
- hairs having a longest hair length of 3 to 8 mm are implanted in a single hair length or in a plurality of hair lengths.
- the hair length difference between the longest hair length implanted in the third region A3 and the shortest hair length implanted in the first region A1 and second region A2 is 1 to 6 mm. is preferred.
- a step is provided in the hair length within the region. The difference in hair length is preferably 1 to 5 mm.
- FIGS. 22 and 23 are external perspective views of the support 150 in the fifth embodiment of the mouthpiece section 120.
- FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the support body 150 viewed from inside in the depth direction.
- FIG. 23 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 22, and is a perspective sectional view of the support body 150 viewed from outside in the depth direction. In FIG. 22, illustration of the shaft 114 is omitted.
- the support body 150 supports the brush portion 130 along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the support 150 includes an inner support 151, an outer support 152, and a connecting portion 153.
- the inner support body 151 is formed into a U-shape when viewed from above.
- the inner support body 151 has an upper wall part 154 located at the upper end and extending along the circumferential direction, a lower wall part 155 located at the lower end and extending along the circumferential direction, and the upper wall part 154 and the lower wall part 155 in the meshing direction.
- An intermediate wall portion 156 located between and extending along the circumferential direction, and connecting wall portions 157, 158, and 159 extending in the meshing direction and connecting the upper wall portion 154 and the lower wall portion 155 via the intermediate wall portion 156.
- the upper wall portion 154, the lower wall portion 155, and the intermediate wall portion 156 are arranged throughout the circumferential direction.
- the connecting wall portion 157 and the connecting wall portion 158 are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction.
- the connecting wall portions 159 are formed at both ends in the circumferential direction.
- the inner support body 151 has fitting recesses 161A, 161B, and 161C located on the upper side and fitting recesses 161D, 161E, and 161F located on the lower side.
- the fitting recesses 161A, 161B, and 161C and the fitting recesses 161D, 161E, and 161F are recessed inward from the surface of the inner support 151 facing outward in the depth direction.
- the fitting recess 161B and the fitting recess 161C are symmetrical in the left-right direction, so the description of the fitting recess 161C may be omitted or simplified in some cases. Further, since the fitting recesses 161D, 161E, and 161F are line symmetrical with the fitting recesses 161A, 161B, and 161C in the meshing direction, the description of the fitting recesses 161D, 161E, and 161F may be omitted or simplified in some cases. .
- the base portion 141 of the inner upper brush portion 131A is removably fitted into the fitting recess 161A from the outside.
- the upper wall 154 and the intermediate wall 156 fit in the coupling part 143 of the inner upper brush part 131A in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall 157 and the connecting wall 158 fit in the base part 141 in the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush portion 131A is removably coupled.
- the base portion 141 of the inner upper brush portion 131B is removably fitted into the fitting recess 161B from the outside.
- the upper wall part 154 and the intermediate wall part 156 are fitted with the joint part 143 of the inner upper brush part 131B in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall part 157 and the connecting wall part 159 are connected to the base part 141 in the circumferential direction.
- the inner upper brush portion 131B is removably coupled.
- the base portion 141 of the inner lower brush portion 131D is removably fitted into the fitting recess 161D from the outside.
- the lower wall part 155 and the intermediate wall part 156 are fitted with the joint part 143 of the inner lower brush part 131D in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall part 157 and the connecting wall part 158 are connected to the base part 141 in the circumferential direction.
- the inner lower brush portion 131D is removably coupled.
- the base portion 141 of the inner upper brush portion 131C is removably fitted into the fitting recess 161C from the outside.
- the base portion 141 of the inner lower brush portion 131E is removably fitted into the fitting recess 161E from the outside.
- the base portion 141 of the inner lower brush portion 131F is removably fitted into the fitting recess 161F from the outside.
- the outer support body 152 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from above.
- the outer support body 152 has an upper wall part 164 located at the upper end and extending along the circumferential direction, a lower wall part 165 located at the lower end and extending along the circumferential direction, and the upper wall part 164 and the lower wall part 165 in the meshing direction.
- an intermediate wall portion 166 located between and extending along the circumferential direction, and connecting wall portions 167, 168, 169 extending in the meshing direction and connecting the upper wall portion 164 and the lower wall portion 165 via the intermediate wall portion 166; 170, 152A.
- the upper wall portion 164, the lower wall portion 165, and the intermediate wall portion 166 are arranged throughout the circumferential direction.
- the connecting wall portion 167 and the connecting wall portion 168 are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction.
- the connecting wall portion 169 and the connecting wall portion 170 are arranged on the outer side of the connecting wall portion 167 and the connecting wall portion 168 in the circumferential direction, respectively.
- the connecting wall portions 152A are formed at both ends in the circumferential direction.
- the intermediate wall portion 166 has the same position in the meshing direction as the intermediate wall portion 156.
- the outer support body 152 has fitting recesses 162A, 162B, 162C, 162D, and 162E located on the upper side and fitting recesses 162F, 162G, 162H, 162J, and 162K located on the lower side.
- the fitting recesses 162A, 162B, 162C, 162D, 162E and the fitting recesses 162F, 162G, 162H, 162J, 162K are recessed outward from the surface of the outer support 152 facing inward in the depth direction.
- the fitting recess 162B and the fitting recess 162D are line symmetrical in the left-right direction
- the fitting recess 162C and the fitting recess 162E are line symmetrical in the left-right direction.
- the description of the fitting recess 162E may be omitted or simplified in some cases.
- the fitting recesses 162F, 162G, 162H, 162J, and 162K are line-symmetrical with the fitting recesses 162A, 162B, 162C, 162D, and 162E in the meshing direction
- the fitting recesses 162F, 162G, 162H, 162J, 162K may be omitted or simplified in some cases.
- the base portion 171 of the outer upper brush portion 132A is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162A from the inside.
- the upper wall part 164 and the intermediate wall part 166 are fitted in the coupling direction of the outer upper brush part 132A, and the connecting wall part 167 and the connecting wall part 168 are connected to the base part 171 in the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 132A is removably coupled.
- the base portion 171 of the outer upper brush portion 132B is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162B from the inside.
- the upper wall part 164 and the intermediate wall part 166 fit into the joint part 173 of the outer upper brush part 132B in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall part 167 and the connecting wall part 169 fit into the base part 171 in the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 132B is removably coupled.
- the base portion 171 of the outer upper brush portion 132C is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162C from the inside.
- the upper wall part 164 and the intermediate wall part 166 are fitted in the coupling direction of the outer upper brush part 132C, and the connecting wall part 169 and the connecting wall part 152A are connected to the base part 171 in the circumferential direction.
- the outer upper brush portion 132C is removably coupled.
- the base portion 171 of the outer lower brush portion 132F is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162F from the inside.
- the lower wall portion 165 and the intermediate wall portion 166 fit into the connecting portion 173 of the outer lower brush portion 132F in the meshing direction, and the connecting wall portion 167 and the connecting wall portion 168 engage with the base portion 171 in the circumferential direction.
- the outer lower brush portion 132F is removably coupled.
- the base portion 171 of the outer upper brush portion 132D is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162D from the inside.
- the base portion 171 of the outer upper brush portion 132E is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162E from the inside.
- the base portion 171 of the outer lower brush portion 132G is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162G from the inside.
- the base portion 171 of the outer lower brush portion 132H is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162H from the inside.
- the base portion 171 of the outer lower brush portion 132J is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162J from the inside.
- the base portion 171 of the outer lower brush portion 132K is removably fitted into the fitting recess 162K from the inside.
- the connecting portion 153 connects the inner support 151 and the outer support 152 in the depth direction.
- the connecting portion 153 connects the inner support body 151 and the outer support body 152 at both ends in the circumferential direction.
- the connecting portion 153 of this embodiment constitutes a support 150 as a molded body integrally formed with an inner support 151 and an outer support 152. Note that the connecting portion 153 is manufactured separately from the inner support 151 and the outer support 152 without being integrally molded, and is bonded to the support 150 in the same way as the brush portion 130 or attached to the support 150 by adhesive or the like. It may be a fixed configuration.
- the connecting portion 153 includes a connecting plate 153A and a hair bundle 153B.
- the connecting plate 153A has a plate shape orthogonal to the meshing direction, and extends to the lower end in the circumferential direction.
- the inner end of the connecting plate 153A is connected to the intermediate wall 156 of the inner support 151.
- the outer end of the connecting plate 153A is connected to the intermediate wall 166 of the outer support 152.
- the hair bundles 153B protrude and extend in the engagement direction from the upper and lower surfaces of the connecting plate 153A, respectively.
- the hair bundle 153B is arranged, for example, at a position facing the back teeth. Since the bristle bundle 153B is arranged at a position facing the back teeth and protrudes upward and downward, it is possible to effectively clean the engagement surfaces of the back teeth that are difficult for the brush portion 130 to reach.
- the support body 150 is a molded body in which the inner support body 151, the outer support body 152, and the connecting portion 153 are integrally molded. Since the support body 150 is a molded body formed as a separate member from the brush part 130, it is not restricted by the brush part 130, and the ease of spreading of the support body 150 can be set to an appropriate level, neither too tight nor too loose. Therefore, the fit of the support body 150 to the tooth row is improved.
- the support body 150 is made of a material different from that of the base parts 141 and 171 in the brush part 130.
- the support body 150 is made of resin having a hardness smaller than that of the base parts 141 and 171. Therefore, the base parts 141, 171 are at least partially covered by a support 150 formed of a different material.
- the risk of damaging the gums and oral mucosa due to contact of the mouthpiece portion 120 with the oral mucosa can be reduced. The feeling of cleaning can be improved.
- the brush portion 130 on which the hair bundles 142 and 172 are implanted is coupled to the support 150, it is not necessary to directly implant the hair bundles on the support 150, which improves productivity and cleanability. can be achieved.
- the difference in hardness between the material forming the base portions 141 and 171 and the material forming the support body 150 is preferably a bending elastic modulus of 200 MPa or more, and more preferably a bending elastic modulus of 500 MPa or more.
- the difference in hardness between the material forming the base portions 141 and 171 and the material forming the support body 150 is preferably a bending elastic modulus of 2800 MPa or less, more preferably a bending elastic modulus of 1500 MPa or less.
- the upper and lower limits of the materials constituting the base portions 141 and 171 and the materials constituting the support body 150 can be arbitrarily combined.
- the base parts 141 and 171 need to be relatively hard to ensure flocking strength, and the support body 150 needs to be relatively flexible to improve the fit to the dentition when the mouthpiece part 120 is moved. There is a need to. If the hardness difference is below the above lower limit, one of the above roles cannot be fulfilled. If the hardness difference between the materials is within the above range, the base portions 141, 171 and the support body 150, which are made of different materials, can move with an appropriate sense of interlocking. In this embodiment, by setting the difference in hardness of the materials within the above range, it becomes possible to move with an appropriate sense of interlocking even though the members are different, and it is possible to improve the cleaning experience.
- the hardness of the material constituting the base portions 141 and 171 is preferably 800 MPa or more in bending elastic modulus and 3000 MPa or less in bending elastic modulus. If the hardness of the material constituting the base portions 141, 171 is less than 800 MPa in bending elastic modulus, cracks are likely to occur during hair transplantation, making it difficult to implant the hair bundles 142, 172. Furthermore, sufficient flocking strength cannot be ensured when moving in conjunction with the support body 150, and vibration transmission when used electrically may also be reduced. If the hardness of the material constituting the base portions 141, 171 exceeds the bending elastic modulus of 3000 MPa, there is a possibility of damaging the inside of the oral cavity.
- the support body 150 may be damaged when moving the mouthpiece portion 120 or fitting it into the support body 150.
- the hardness of the material constituting the base parts 141 and 171 to a bending elastic modulus of 800 MPa or more and a bending elastic modulus of 3000 MPa or less, sufficient flocking that can move in conjunction with the support body 150 can be achieved while suppressing the possibility of damaging the oral cavity. Strength can be guaranteed.
- the hardness of the material constituting the support body 150 is preferably 50 MPa or more and 1000 MPa or less. If the hardness of the material constituting the support body 150 is less than 50 MPa, the base portions 141 and 171 may not be supported sufficiently. If the hardness of the material constituting the support body 150 exceeds 1000 MPa, the feel of the material when it comes into contact with the buccal mucosa and the tongue may be reduced. In addition, the pressure inside the oral cavity is strong and may cause reflex vomiting. Furthermore, when the mouthpiece portion 120 is moved, the shape may not follow and the fit to the tooth row may not be ensured.
- the hardness of the material constituting the support body 150 By setting the hardness of the material constituting the support body 150 to 50 MPa or more and 100 MPa or less, it is possible to sufficiently support the base portions 141 and 171, and to ensure a softness that is comfortable to the touch when it comes into contact with the buccal mucosa and the tongue.
- the area where they are separated preferably accounts for 20% or more, and more preferably 30% or more.
- the spaced apart region preferably exists at 70% or less, more preferably at 60% or less.
- the upper and lower limits of the separated regions of the contours of the inner support 151 and the outer support 152 that constitute the support 150 can be arbitrarily combined. If the spaced apart region is within the above range, the shape of the support body 150 can be stabilized, and the support body 150 can fit securely to the tooth row to ensure cleaning power. Furthermore, since the joint between the inner support 151 and the outer support 152 is only a part, the area where bristles can be implanted can be increased, and the cleaning power can be improved.
- the location where the inner support 151 and the outer support 152 are connected is preferably at the center in the circumferential direction or at the occlusal surface of the back teeth.
- the method for manufacturing the toothbrush 101 configured as described above includes a gripping part 110 and a mouthpiece part 120 connected to the gripping part 110, and the mouthpiece part 120 has a hair bundle 142 on the base parts 141 and 171.
- , 172, and the base parts 141, 171 are molded from a different material, cover at least a part of the base parts 141, 171, and extend along the circumferential direction around the axis extending in the meshing direction.
- Preparing the brush portion 130 involves preparing the inner upper brush portions 131A, 131B, and 131C, which constitute the inner brush portion 131 in which the base portion 141 is provided with the bristles 142, and the inner lower brush portions 131D, 131E, and 131F. including preparing each.
- Preparing the brush portion 130 also includes the outer upper brush portions 132A, 132B, 132C, 132D, and 132E that constitute the outer brush portion 132 in which the hair bundles 172 are provided on the base portion 171, the outer lower brush portion 132F, 132G, 132H, 132J, and 132K, respectively.
- preparing the brush section 130 includes planting the bristle bundles 142 in the bristle implantation holes 141b of the base section 141 and implanting the bristle bundles 172 in the bristle implantation holes 171b of the base section 171.
- Preparing the support body 150 includes integrally molding the inner support body 151, the outer support body 152, and the connecting portion 153 by injection molding or the like.
- preparing the support 150 means molding the inner support 151, the outer support 152, the connecting part 153, and the shaft 114 by injection molding or the like. including. If the mouthpiece part 120 is electric, and if the shaft 114 is to be fixed after integrally molding the inner support 151, the outer support 152, and the connecting part 153, preparing the support 150 is to prepare the inner support 151, the outer support 152, and the connection part 153. This includes integrally molding the body 152 and the connecting portion 153 by injection molding or the like, and fixing the shaft 114.
- Coupling the brush part 130 to the support body 150 means connecting the base parts 141 and 171 of each prepared brush part 130 to the fitting recesses 161A, 161B, and 161C in the inner support body 151 of the prepared support body 150. Fitting and coupling into the fitting recesses 161D, 161E, 161F, and fitting into the fitting recesses 162A, 162B, 162C, 162D, 162E and the fitting recesses 162F, 162G, 162H, 162J, 162K in the outer support body 152. and combining.
- the mouthpiece part 120 in which the brush part 130 is arranged in a U-shape along the circumferential direction, as shown in FIG. 17, is manufactured.
- the brush part 130 and the support body 150 which are made of different materials and have the bristle bundles 142 and 172, are combined to form the mouthpiece part 120.
- Optimum shape, material, etc. specifications can be achieved without being constrained by. Therefore, with the toothbrush 101 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the cleaning performance of each part in the oral cavity and to improve the feeling of cleaning due to the high fit of the support body 150 to the tooth row.
- the inner support body 151 and the outer support body 152 are continuous in the circumferential direction.
- the structure may be arranged in When adopting this configuration, for example, the connecting portion 153 is disposed entirely in the circumferential direction, the inner support 151 is intermittently arranged inside the connecting portion 153, and the outer support 152 is disposed outside the connecting portion 153. It is also possible to have a configuration in which they are arranged intermittently.
- the mouthpiece portion 120 may be provided in only one region of the left and right, and the connecting portion 153 may also be provided only in that region. good.
- the connecting portion 153 that connects the inner support body 151 and the outer support body 152 is arranged at the end in the circumferential direction, but the configuration is not limited to this.
- the connecting portion 153 may connect the inner support 151 and the outer support 152 at the center in the circumferential direction.
- the brush part 130 and the support body 150 are simply shown, and the illustration of the hair bundle is also omitted.
- a flat protrusion may be provided from at least one of the inner support 151 and the outer support 152 toward the other.
- the protrusion may connect the inner support 151 and the outer support 152. Providing the protrusion allows the meshing surfaces of the teeth to rub against each other, improving cleaning power.
- the thickness of the protrusion is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 mm.
- FIG. 25 is a front view of a toothbrush 201 according to the third embodiment.
- the toothbrush 201 is a mouthpiece type toothbrush and includes a grip portion 210 and a connecting body 220.
- the connecting body 220 will be referred to as a mouthpiece section 220.
- Mouthpiece section 220 is given vibration via grip section 210 .
- a shaft 214 protrudes from the grip section 210 and is connected to a mouthpiece section 220. Note that the shaft 214 protruding from the mouthpiece section 220 may be connected to the grip section 210.
- the mouthpiece section 220 is given vibration from the grip section 210 via the shaft 214.
- the present invention provides a configuration in which a gripping portion 210 manually applies a sweeping motion to the mouthpiece portion 220 in up and down, left and right, front and rear directions, and a combination thereof, a configuration in which vibration is manually applied, and a configuration in which a cleaning motion is manually applied to the mouthpiece portion 220 from the gripping portion 210. It is applicable to any configuration in which vibration is applied electrically to the piece portion 220. In this embodiment, a configuration will be described in which the grip portion 210 is provided with an electric drive unit and vibrations generated by driving the electric drive unit are applied to the mouthpiece portion 220.
- the electric drive unit includes a power supply section 211, a vibration element 212, and a control section 213.
- the control unit 213 drives the vibration element 212 using the power from the power supply unit 211 .
- the power supply unit 211 includes, for example, a rechargeable battery, a battery, or the like.
- the vibration element 212 is composed of, for example, a piezoelectric element, an electromagnetic acoustic transducer, an unbalanced motor, or the like.
- the vibration generated by the vibration element 212 is a vibration in which the rotation direction is rotated about an axis extending in the depth direction, and the rotation direction is repeatedly reversed at a constant predetermined rotation angle.
- the shaft 214 connected to the electric drive unit in the gripping part 210 vibrates by repeatedly reversing its rotational direction.
- the mouthpiece portion 220 vibrates by repeatedly reversing the direction of rotation.
- the mouthpiece portion 220 includes a first brush body 230, a second brush body 260, and a connecting portion 280.
- the first brush body 230 is located inside the grip portion 210 in the depth direction.
- the second brush body 260 is located between the grip portion 210 and the first brush body 230 in the depth direction, and is arranged apart from the first brush body 230.
- the second brush body 260 is arranged with a gap S apart from the first brush body 230.
- the first brush body 230 is located on the tongue side, which is inside the row of teeth.
- the second brush body 260 is located on the buccal side, which is outside the row of teeth.
- the first brush body 230 has a first support body 231 and a first brush part 241.
- the first support body 231 supports the base end side of the first brush portion 241 .
- the first support body 231 is formed in a U-shape (horseshoe shape) along the circumferential direction centering on the axis J when viewed from above.
- the first support body 231 is open inward.
- the second brush body 260 has a second support body 261 and a second brush part 271.
- the second support body 261 supports the base end side of the second brush portion 271.
- the second support body 261 is formed in a U-shape (horseshoe shape) along the circumferential direction centering on the axis J when viewed from above.
- the second support body 261 is open inward.
- first brush body 230 and the second brush body 260 face the tooth row is not limited to the entire tooth row, but also front teeth (central incisors, lateral incisors), canines, and back teeth (first premolars, second premolars). Only some of the premolars, first molars, and second molars may face each other.
- FIG. 26 is an external perspective view of the mouthpiece section 220 viewed from inside in the depth direction.
- FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 26.
- the dimension of the first support body 231 in the engagement direction is largest on the outside in the depth direction, and gradually decreases toward the inside.
- the upper end of the first support body 231 is located at the uppermost side on the outer side in the depth direction, and gradually slopes downward toward the inner side.
- the lower end of the first support body 231 is located at the lowermost side on the outer side in the depth direction, and gradually slopes upward toward the inner side.
- the dimension of the second support body 261 in the meshing direction is largest on the outside in the depth direction, and gradually decreases toward the inside.
- the upper end of the second support body 261 is located at the uppermost side on the outer side in the depth direction, and gradually slopes downward toward the inner side.
- the lower end of the second support body 261 is located at the lowermost side on the outer side in the depth direction, and gradually slopes upward toward the inner side.
- the maximum dimension in the meshing direction of the second support body 261 on the outside in the depth direction is larger than the maximum dimension in the meshing direction of the first support body 231 on the outside in the depth direction.
- the minimum dimension in the meshing direction of the second support 261 on the inside in the depth direction is larger than the minimum dimension in the meshing direction of the first support 231 on the inside in the depth direction.
- the dimension of the second support 261 in the meshing direction is larger than the dimension of the first support 231 in the meshing direction throughout the depth direction.
- FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 25.
- the first brush portions 241 are provided on the first support body 231 at intervals in the vertical direction.
- the first brush portions 241 are provided on the upper end side and the lower end side of the first support body 231, respectively.
- the first brush portion 241 extends outward in the depth direction from the outer brush surface 231a of the first support body 231 in the depth direction.
- the brush surface 231a has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in an outwardly convex direction when viewed from above.
- the toothbrush 201 uses the first brush portion 241 arranged along the row of teeth and is intended to be moved manually or electrically, so the brush surface 231a may be curved. Therefore, the first brush portion 241 can be placed along the lingual side of the tooth row, and cleaning performance and fitting performance can be improved. Further, it is possible to maximize the installation area of the first brush portion 241, and in the case of an electric drive, it can contribute to improving vibration efficiency and cleaning power.
- the first brush section 241 includes first brush sections 241A, 241B, and 241C, and first brush sections 241D, 241E, and 241F.
- the first brush parts 241A, 241B, 241C and the first brush parts 241D, 241E, 241F extend outward in the depth direction from the brush surface 231a.
- the first brush portion 241A extends outward from the upper end of the brush surface 231a.
- the first brush portion 241B extends outward from a position below the first brush portion 241A.
- the first brush portion 241C extends outward from a position below the first brush portion 241B.
- the first brush portion 241D extends outward from the lower end of the brush surface 231a.
- the first brush portion 241E extends outward from a position above the first brush portion 241D.
- the first brush portion 241F extends outward from a position above the first brush portion 241E.
- the first brush portion 241 including the first brush portions 241A, 241B, 241C and the first brush portions 241D, 241E, 241F are spaced apart from each other throughout the circumferential direction. There are multiple locations.
- the first brush part 241 has a tilt angle closer to the meshing surface K when viewed from the side parallel to the meshing surface K. It is small, and the farther from the meshing surface K, the larger it is.
- the inclination angle of the first brush parts 241A, 241D which are close to the gum side and farthest from the engagement surface K, is larger than the inclination angle of the first brush parts 241B, 241E and the first brush parts 241C, 241F.
- the angle of inclination of the first brush parts 241C, 241F closest to the engagement surface K is smaller than the angle of inclination of the first brush parts 241A, 241D and the first brush parts 241B, 241E.
- the dimensions of the tooth surfaces in the meshing direction are the arrangement pitch in the meshing direction at the roots of the first brush portions 241A and 241C, and the arrangement in the meshing direction at the roots of the first brush portions 241D and 241F. Since the pitch is often larger than the pitch, if the inclination angles of the first brush parts 241A to 241C and 241D to 241F are the same, the tips of the first brush parts 241A to 241C and 241D to 241F cover the entire tooth surface in the meshing direction. It becomes difficult to do.
- the inclination angle increases sequentially from the first brush part 241C to the first brush part 241A and from the first brush part 241F to the first brush part 241D, even when the mouth is slightly open,
- the first brush parts 241C and 241F can be fitted to the tip of the teeth on the tongue side, and the first brush parts 241A and 241D can be fitted to the gum side on the tongue side.
- the first brush part 241A and the first brush part 241B, the first brush part 241B and the first brush part 241C, the first brush part 241D and the first brush part 241E, and the first brush part 241E and the first brush are adjacent in the meshing direction.
- the arrangement pitches of the portions 241F in the circumferential direction are shifted by, for example, a half pitch. That is, when viewed in the direction facing the brush surface 231a, the first brush parts 241A, 241B, 241C and the first brush parts 241D, 241E, 241F are arranged in a staggered manner, respectively.
- the gap between the first brush parts 241 can be reduced, which improves the fit to the tooth surface and the ease of cleaning. can be improved.
- the second brush portion 271 is provided on the second support body 261 with an interval in the vertical direction.
- the second brush portions 271 are provided on the upper end side and the lower end side of the second support body 261, respectively.
- the second brush portion 271 extends inward in the depth direction from the brush surface 261a on the inside in the depth direction of the second support body 261.
- the brush surface 261a has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in an outwardly convex direction when viewed from above.
- the toothbrush 201 uses the second brush part 271 arranged along the row of teeth and is intended to be moved manually or electrically, so the brush surface 261a may be curved. Therefore, the second brush portion 271 can be placed along the buccal side of the tooth row, and cleaning performance and fitting performance can be improved. Further, it is possible to maximize the installation area of the second brush portion 271, and in the case of an electric drive, it can contribute to improving vibration efficiency and cleaning power.
- the second brush section 271 includes second brush sections 271A, 271B, 271C, and 271D, and second brush sections 271E, 271F, 271G, and 271H.
- the second brush parts 271A, 271B, 271C, 271D and the second brush parts 271E, 271F, 271G, 271H extend inward in the depth direction from the brush surface 261a.
- the second brush portion 271A extends outward from the upper end of the brush surface 261a.
- the second brush portion 271B extends inward from a position below the second brush portion 271A.
- the second brush portion 271C extends inward from a position below the second brush portion 271B.
- the second brush portion 271D extends inward from a position below the second brush portion 271C.
- the second brush portion 271E extends inward from the lower end of the brush surface 261a.
- the second brush portion 271F extends inward from a position above the second brush portion 271E.
- the second brush portion 271G extends inward from a position above the second brush portion 271F.
- the second brush portion 271H extends inward from a position above the second brush portion 271G.
- the second brush portion 271 including the second brush portions 271A, 271B, 271C, 271D and the second brush portions 271E, 271F, 271G, 271H extends over the entire circumferential direction, respectively. Multiple locations are provided at intervals.
- the angle of inclination with respect to the meshing surface K is smaller as it is closer to the meshing surface K, and larger as it is farther from the meshing surface K.
- the inclination angles of the second brush parts 271A and 271E which are close to the gum side and farthest from the engagement surface K, are larger than the inclination angles of the second brush parts 271B to 271D and 271F to 271H.
- the inclination angles of the second brush parts 271C, 271D, 271G, and 271H close to the engagement surface K are smaller than the inclination angles of the second brush parts 271A, 271B and the second brush parts 271E, 271F.
- the inclination angles of the second brush parts 271C and 271D are the same, and the inclination angles of the second brush parts 271G and 271H are the same.
- the configuration may be such that the angle of inclination of the second brush part 271D is smaller than the angle of inclination of the second brush part 271C, and the angle of inclination of the second brush part 271H is smaller than the angle of inclination of the second brush part 271G.
- the dimensions of the tooth surfaces in the meshing direction are the arrangement pitch in the meshing direction at the roots of the second brush portion 271A and the second brush portion 271D, and the arrangement in the meshing direction at the roots of the second brush portion 271E and the second brush portion 271H. Since it is often larger than the pitch, if the inclination angles of the second brush parts 271A to 271D and 271E to 271H are the same, the tips of the second brush parts 271A to 271D and 271E to 271H cover the entire tooth surface in the meshing direction. It becomes difficult to do.
- the second brush parts 271C, 271D, 271G, and 271H can be fitted to the tip of the teeth on the tongue side, and the second brush parts 271A and 271E can be fitted to the gum side on the tongue side.
- the second brush part 271A and the second brush part 271B, the second brush part 271B and the second brush part 271C, the second brush part 271C and the second brush part 271D, and the second brush part 271E and the second brush are adjacent in the meshing direction.
- the arrangement pitches of the portion 271F, the second brush portion 271F and the second brush portion 271G, and the second brush portion 271G and the second brush portion 271H in the circumferential direction are shifted by, for example, a half pitch.
- the second brush parts 271A, 271B, 271C, 271D and the second brush parts 271E, 271F, 271G, 271H are arranged in a staggered manner, respectively.
- the gap between the second brush parts 271 can be reduced and the fit to the tooth surface can be improved. Improves performance and cleanability.
- FIG. 29 is a front view of the first brush body 230, the second brush body 260, and the connecting portion 280 excluding the connecting portions with the first brush portion 241, the second brush portion 271, and the grip portion 210.
- a brush surface 231a and a brush surface 261a face each other with a gap S in the depth direction, except for the connection region by the connection part 280. That is, the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 face each other with a gap S in between in the depth direction.
- the first support body 231 in the first brush body 230 and the second support body 261 in the second brush body 260 have a depth including deformation characteristics when the mouthpiece part 220 is installed in the oral cavity and used to fit the dentition. Relative movement is possible independently in both the direction and the ⁇ direction.
- the first support body 231 in the first brush body 230 and the second support body 261 in the second brush body 260 are independently movable relative to each other in at least one of the depth direction and the circumferential direction. When the first brush body 230 and the second brush body 260 are moved, they can move freely without being restricted by each other and can fit into the dentition. In addition, the first support body 231 in the first brush body 230 and the second support body 261 in the second brush body 260 can follow the shape of the tooth row and the brushing motion, and the Cleaning power improves by fitting each of them.
- first support body 231 and the second support body 261 have different shape characteristics or material characteristics.
- shape characteristics include dimensions in the depth direction, dimensions in the circumferential direction, dimensions in the meshing direction, and the like.
- Material properties include hardness, flexural modulus, and the like.
- the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 of this embodiment have different hardnesses as material characteristics.
- the hardness of the first support 231 is preferably greater than the hardness of the second support 261.
- the hardness of the first support body 231 it is more preferable to be formed of a soft resin having a Shore A hardness of 50 or more and a Shore D hardness of 75 or less.
- the second support 261 is preferably formed of a soft resin having a Shore A hardness of 40 or more and a Shore D hardness of 70 or less.
- “Shore A hardness” means the durometer A hardness of plastics measured according to JIS K 7215 or JIS K 6253.
- “Shore D hardness” means durometer type D hardness specified in JIS K 6253.
- the second support 261 located on the outside is made softer than the first support 231.
- the second support body 261 can be deformed and the followability of the second brush part 271 to the tooth row can be improved.
- the change in curvature is small and there is little steric hindrance, so by making the first support 231 located on the inside harder than the second support 261, The followability of the first brush portion 241 on the body 231 to the tooth row can be improved.
- the resistance associated with the movement of the first support 231 and the second support 261 in the ⁇ direction also differs depending on the presence or absence of the steric hindrance and the amount of change in curvature.
- the second support 261 located on the outside where the resistance associated with movement is greater than that of the first support 231, the second support 261 can be easily moved in the ⁇ direction relative to the first support 231.
- the second brush portion 271 can be relatively moved and deformed to improve the followability of the second brush portion 271 to the tooth row.
- the first support body 231 and the second brush body 261 in the first brush body 230 can be The independence of the movement of the second support body 261 increases, making it possible for the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 to follow the shape of the tooth row and the brushing action, and to move the second support body 261 on the buccal and lingual sides of the tooth row. Cleaning power improves by fitting the product.
- the hardness of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 is within the above range, and if the hardness of the soft resin is less than the lower limit value, the scraping force may be insufficient and the mouthpiece part 220 may If it is electric, there will be a lack of vibration transmission and the cleaning function will be reduced.
- the hardness of the soft resin exceeds the above upper limit, the first brush portion 241 and the second brush portion 271 become difficult to bend, resulting in poor fit and poor cleaning performance.
- elastomers can be used as the soft resin constituting the first brush body 230 and the second brush body 260, including polyurethane and silicone.
- Polyurethane tends to have higher tensile strength and mechanical abrasion resistance than other elastomers such as styrene and polyester, so using polyurethane as a soft resin makes it difficult to break even when made thin. , can enable mechanical strength and long-term use.
- Silicone has particularly high heat resistance and chemical resistance, and can reduce quality deterioration when sterilized by boiling or in the presence of toothpaste.
- the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 which face each other in the depth direction at the same position in the ⁇ direction, have different dimensions in the depth direction.
- the dimension L1 in the depth direction of the first support body 231 is preferably 1.5 mm or more and 7 mm or less.
- the dimension L2 in the depth direction of the second support body 261 is preferably 1.5 mm or more and 6 mm or less.
- the end portion in the ⁇ direction is larger than the dimension L2 in the depth direction of the second support body 261. That is, at the end in the ⁇ direction, the depth dimension L2 of the second support body 261 is smaller (thinner) than the depth direction dimension L1 of the first support body 231.
- the first support 231 and the second support 261 can move to follow the tooth row shape and brushing operation. . Thereby, the fit of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 to the tooth row and the cleaning power can be improved.
- the depth dimension L2 of the second support body 261 located on the outer side is thinner than the depth direction dimension L1 of the first support body 231 located on the inner side, each can have different movements. It fits both the buccal and lingual sides of the teeth, improving cleaning power.
- the second support 261 on the outer side which has a large change in curvature and also has steric hindrance due to the buccal mucosa, is made thinner and softer than the first support 231 so that it can follow the dentition. It increases.
- the first support body 231 on the inner side which has a small change in curvature, is made thicker than the second support body 261 on the outer side to suppress softness, thereby increasing followability.
- the dimensions in the depth direction of the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 gradually decrease from the center in the ⁇ direction toward the ends, that is, from the front tooth side to the back tooth side.
- the mouthpiece portion 220 is moved from side to side, there is a high risk that both the first brush body 230 and the second brush body 260 will come out of alignment on the molar side.
- the flexibility of the molar side increases, and the followability of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 to the tooth row can be improved.
- the connecting portion 280 extends in the circumferential direction orthogonal to the meshing direction.
- the connecting portion 280 has a rectangular plate shape when viewed from above.
- FIG. 30 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 26.
- the connecting portion 280 connects the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 in the depth direction.
- the connecting portion 280 connects the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 at the ends in the circumferential direction.
- the connecting portion 280 connects the first support 231 and the second support 261 at a central position in the meshing direction.
- the connecting portion 280 has a third brush portion 281 .
- the third brush portion 281 has a mountain-shaped bristle length profile with a peak at the midpoint in the depth direction.
- the bristle length profile of the third brush portion 281 can be changed or selected as appropriate, such as an arch shape or a dome shape, depending on the purpose. Since the third brush portion 281 has a chevron-shaped bristle length profile, it has a profile that fits the meshing surfaces of the teeth, improving cleaning power.
- the third brush portion 281 is arranged, for example, at a position facing the back teeth. Since the third brush part 281 is arranged at a position facing the back teeth and protrudes upward and downward, the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 can effectively clean the occlusal surfaces of the back teeth that are difficult to reach. can.
- the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 have a region connected by the connecting part 280 among the lengths in the ⁇ direction that face each other in the depth direction, and are not separated from each other in the depth direction. Areas that are not covered are spaced apart in the depth direction. A gap S is formed in a region where the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 are separated from each other.
- the length in the ⁇ direction where the first support 231 and the second support 261 face each other in the depth direction is L11, and the area where the first support 231 and the second support 261 are separated in the depth direction is L11.
- the ratio of the length L12 to the length L11 is preferably 20% or more and 70% or less, more preferably 30% or more and 60% or less.
- a gap S which is a separation area
- the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 can be moved to follow the shape of the tooth row and the brushing operation without being affected by the tooth row, and the fit of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 to the tooth row and the cleaning power can be improved. If the ratio of the length L12 to the length L11 is less than 20%, vibrations will be excessively absorbed by the connecting portion 280 because the area connected by the connecting portion 280 is relatively large. Furthermore, since the separation area is small, one of the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 is likely to be restrained by the other, making it difficult to move following the shape of the tooth row or brushing motion.
- the vibration source exists on the second support body 261 side on the outer side, and vibrations are transmitted from the second support body 261 on the outer side to the first support body 231 on the inner side.
- the vibrations and brushing action transmitted from the first support body 231 to the second support body 261 become insufficient.
- the ratio of the length L12 to the length L11 is 20% or more and 70% or less, it is possible to suppress vibrations and deterioration of the brushing operation and improve the cleaning power.
- connection position of the first support 231 and the second support 261 by the connection part 280, where the first support 231 and the second support 261 are in a non-separated area in the depth direction is preferably on the molar side.
- the non-separated region on the molar side it is possible to prevent the behavior of the first support 231 and the second support 261 from being excessively different.
- the connecting portion 280 on the molar side it is possible to play the role of cleaning the engagement surface.
- the connecting portion 280 is a non-separated area.
- the connection position between the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 is preferably a position 30% or more away from the vibration source. If the distance from the vibration source to the connection position of the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 is less than 30% of the area from the center to the end in the ⁇ direction, the vibration is sufficiently transmitted to the end in the ⁇ direction. There is a possibility that it will not be done. By making the area from the vibration source to the connection position of the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 30% or more of the area from the center to the end in the ⁇ direction, vibrations are sufficiently transmitted to the end in the ⁇ direction. becomes possible.
- the connecting portion 280 connecting the first support 231 and the second support 261 is preferably formed so as to include at least a part of a material harder than the first support 231 and the second support 261. This makes it difficult to attenuate vibrations transmitted between the first support body 231 and the second support body 261.
- the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 are independently movable relative to each other in both the depth direction and the ⁇ direction.
- the brush body 230 and the second brush body 260 are moved, each can move freely without being restricted by the other. Therefore, in the toothbrush 201 of this embodiment, the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 each fit the tooth row with a high fit, thereby improving the cleaning power and providing a high cleaning experience.
- FIG. 31 is a front view of the mouthpiece section 220 according to the seventh embodiment.
- illustrations of the connection points with the first brush part 241, the second brush part 271, and the grip part 210 are omitted.
- curved portions 232 are provided at both ends of the first support body 231 in the ⁇ direction when viewed from above, each curved outward in the depth direction starting from an inflection point 230a. It is being
- curved portions 262 are provided that curve inward in the depth direction starting from an inflection point 260a.
- the curved portion 232 and the curved portion 262 are curved in a direction in which they approach each other in the depth direction as they go outward in the ⁇ direction.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the sixth embodiment.
- the curved portion 232 curves the molar tooth located at the end in the ⁇ direction from the inside on the distal surface of the tooth.
- the curved part 262 has a shape that moves differently so as to involve the distal surface of the tooth from the outside, and the followability and cleaning power of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 for the back teeth can be further improved. .
- FIG. 32 is a front view of the mouthpiece section 220 according to the eighth embodiment.
- illustrations of the connection points with the first brush part 241, the second brush part 271, and the grip part 210 are omitted.
- a plurality of V-shaped notches 233 are formed on the brush surface 231a facing the gap S in the first support body 231 when viewed from above. There is.
- the notches 233 are arranged at intervals in the ⁇ direction.
- the notches 233 are arranged line-symmetrically in the ⁇ direction.
- a plurality of V-shaped notches 263 are formed on the brush surface 261a facing the gap S in the second support body 261 when viewed from above.
- the notches 263 are arranged at intervals in the ⁇ direction.
- the notches 263 are arranged line-symmetrically in the ⁇ direction.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the sixth embodiment.
- the first support body 231 is more likely to bend outward than inward in the depth direction.
- the second support body 261 since a plurality of notches 263 are formed in the brush surface 261a, the second support body 261 is more likely to bend inward than outward in the depth direction. Therefore, in the mouthpiece portion 220 of this embodiment, in addition to obtaining the same functions and effects as those of the sixth embodiment, the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 is wide. The followability of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 with respect to the tooth row can be improved by changing the state from the narrow state to the narrow state.
- FIG. 33 is a front view of the mouthpiece section 220 according to the ninth embodiment.
- illustrations of the connection points with the first brush part 241, the second brush part 271, and the grip part 210 are omitted.
- a plurality of V-shaped notches 234 are formed on the surface 231b of the first support body 231 on the opposite side to the brush surface 231a when viewed from above. has been done.
- the notches 234 are arranged at intervals in the ⁇ direction.
- the cutout portions 234 are arranged line-symmetrically in the ⁇ direction.
- a plurality of V-shaped notches 264 are formed on the surface 261b of the second support body 261 on the opposite side to the brush surface 261a facing the gap S. .
- the notches 264 are arranged at intervals in the ⁇ direction.
- the cutout portions 264 are arranged line-symmetrically in the ⁇ direction.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the sixth embodiment.
- the first support body 231 is more likely to bend inward than outward in the depth direction.
- the second support body 261 since a plurality of notches 264 are formed on the surface 261b, the second support body 261 is more likely to bend outward than inward in the depth direction. Therefore, in the mouthpiece portion 220 of this embodiment, in addition to obtaining the same functions and effects as those of the sixth embodiment, the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 is narrow. The followability of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 with respect to the tooth row can be improved by changing from the state to the wide state.
- a notch 233 is formed on the brush surface 231a
- a notch 234 is formed on the surface 231b opposite to the brush surface 231a.
- the configuration is not limited to this.
- a notch 233 is formed on the brush surface 231a
- a notch 234 is formed on the surface 231b on the opposite side of the brush surface 231a at the corner of the third tooth in the ⁇ direction.
- the notch 233 formed on the brush surface 231a and the notch 234 formed on the surface 231b opposite to the brush surface 231a may be appropriately mixed.
- FIG. 34 is a front view of the mouthpiece section 220 according to the tenth embodiment.
- illustrations of the connection points with the first brush part 241, the second brush part 271, and the grip part 210 are omitted.
- a plurality of semicircular notches 235 are formed on the brush surface 231a facing the gap S in the first support body 231 when viewed from above. There is.
- the notches 235 are arranged at intervals in the ⁇ direction.
- the notches 235 are arranged line-symmetrically in the ⁇ direction.
- a plurality of semicircular notches 265 are formed on the brush surface 261a facing the gap S in the second support 261 when viewed from above.
- the notches 265 are arranged at intervals in the ⁇ direction.
- the cutout portions 265 are arranged line-symmetrically in the ⁇ direction.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the eighth embodiment.
- the curved surfaces of the semicircular notches 235 and 265 follow one curved surface of the tooth. This makes it possible to further improve the followability of the first brush section 241 and the second brush section 271 with respect to the tooth row. In addition, in order to improve cleaning performance, it is also possible to fill the notches 235 and 265 with materials having different hardnesses.
- FIG. 35 is a front view of the mouthpiece section 220 according to the eleventh embodiment.
- illustrations of the connection points with the first brush part 241, the second brush part 271, and the grip part 210 are omitted.
- the mouthpiece section 220 includes a first hard plate 236 provided on the first brush body 230 and a second hard plate 266 provided on the second brush body 260. , has at least one.
- the mouthpiece section 220 according to this embodiment includes both the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266, but may have a configuration in which only one of them is provided.
- the first hard plate 236 is provided on the first support body 231 of the first brush body 230 along the ⁇ direction.
- the first rigid plate 236 is embedded in the first support 231 .
- the first hard plate 236 is made of a harder resin than the first brush body 230.
- the first hard plate 236 applies tension to the first support 231 toward the outside, which is the other side in the depth direction, when a load is applied to the first support 231 inward, which is the other side in the depth direction. .
- the first support body 231 maintains its basic U-shape and is assisted to follow the shape of the tooth row, which improves the fit and cleaning power of the first brush part 241, and further improves the oral cavity. It's easier to get inside.
- the first hard plate 236 embedded in the first support body 231 is the same as the shape of the unloaded first support body 231, the first hard plate 236 has a U-shape that is the basis of the first support body 231.
- a force is applied via the first support body 231 to cause elastic deformation inward in the depth direction, an elastic restoring force is applied outward in the depth direction.
- the first support body 231 when the unloaded first hard plate 236 has a larger radius of curvature than the shape of the first hard plate 236 embedded in the first support body 231, the first support body 231 The force applies tension outward in the depth direction. Therefore, the first support body 231 is difficult to bend inward in the depth direction, and easy to bend outward in the depth direction. That is, the first support body 231 has anisotropy regarding the bending property in the depth direction.
- the radius of curvature of the unloaded first hard plate 236 is preferably 15 mm or more and 40 mm or less.
- the second hard plate 266 is provided on the second support body 261 of the second brush body 260 along the ⁇ direction.
- the second rigid plate 266 is embedded in the second support 261.
- the second hard plate 266 is made of a harder resin than the second brush body 260.
- the second hard plate 266 applies tension to the second support body 261 inward, which is one side in the depth direction, when a load is applied to the second support body 261 in the outside, which is the other side in the depth direction. .
- the second support body 261 maintains its basic U-shape and is assisted to follow the shape of the tooth row, which improves the fit and cleaning power of the second brush part 271, and further improves the oral cavity. It's easier to get inside.
- the second hard plate 266 embedded in the second support body 261 When the shape of the second hard plate 266 embedded in the second support body 261 is the same as the shape of the second support body 261 without a load, the second hard plate 266 has a U-shape that is the basis of the second support body 261. When the shape is maintained and a force is applied via the second support body 261 to cause elastic deformation outward in the depth direction, an elastic restoring force is applied to the inner side in the depth direction.
- the second support 261 can The force applies tension inward in the depth direction. Therefore, the second support body 261 is difficult to bend outward in the depth direction, and easy to bend inward in the depth direction.
- the radius of curvature of the unloaded second hard plate 266 is preferably 20 mm or more and 60 mm or less.
- the hardness of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 is preferably 50 or more Shore A hardness and 75 or less Shore D hardness. Further, the hardness of the first hard plate 236 is preferably greater than the hardness of the second hard plate 266. By setting the hardness of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 to a Shore A hardness of 50 or more, vibrations can be efficiently transmitted. By setting the hardness of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 to a Shore D hardness of 75 or less, the followability of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 to the tooth row can be improved.
- the outer side of the dentition in the depth direction has a large change in curvature and there is also steric hindrance due to the buccal mucosa, so the second hard plate 266 located on the outside is made softer than the first hard plate 236.
- the change in curvature is small and there are few steric hindrances, so by making the first hard plate 236 located on the inside harder than the second hard plate 266, the first brush The followability of the first brush portion 241 on the body 230 to the tooth row can be improved.
- the dimensions in the depth direction of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 are preferably 0.5 mm or more and 2.0 mm or less. It is preferable that the dimension in the depth direction of the first hard plate 236 is larger than the dimension in the depth direction of the second hard plate 266.
- vibrations can be efficiently transmitted.
- the dimension in the depth direction of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 can be adjusted.
- first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 are present in an area of 15% or more from the center in the ⁇ direction, when an inward load is applied to the first support body 231 in the depth direction, the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 are Tension can be applied to the support body 231 outward in the depth direction, and when a load is applied to the second support body 261 outward in the depth direction, tension can be applied to the second support body 261 inward in the depth direction. . Since the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 are present in an area of 95% or less from the center in the ⁇ direction, it can be used without giving a feeling of pressure to the dentition or an uncomfortable feeling of vibration.
- the dimensions in the depth direction of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 gradually decrease from the front tooth side to the back tooth side, that is, from the center to the end in the ⁇ direction.
- the mouthpiece portion 220 is moved from side to side, there is a high risk that both the first brush body 230 and the second brush body 260 will come out of alignment on the molar side.
- gradually decreasing the depth direction dimensions of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 from the front tooth side to the back tooth side especially the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266
- the flexibility of the molar side increases, and the followability of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 to the tooth row can be improved.
- the dimensions of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 in the meshing direction become gradually smaller from the front tooth side to the back tooth side, that is, from the center to the end in the ⁇ direction. This provides the same effect as when the dimensions in the depth direction of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 are gradually reduced from the front teeth side toward the back teeth side.
- the first hard plate 236 is curved outward in the depth direction from the inflection point at both ends in the ⁇ direction. It is preferable to provide a plate curved portion that curves inward in the depth direction starting from an inflection point at both ends of the second hard plate 266 in the ⁇ direction. As a result, the plate curved portion of the first hard plate 236 wraps the distal surface of the tooth located at the end in the ⁇ direction from the inside, and the plate curved portion of the second hard plate 266 wraps the distal surface of the tooth from the outside. As a result, the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 can further improve the followability and cleaning power of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 with respect to the back teeth.
- a semicircular plate notch is provided on the outer surface of the first hard plate 236 in the depth direction. It is preferable to provide a semicircular plate notch on the inner surface in the depth direction. This makes it possible for the first support 231 and the second support 261 located in the plate notch to follow one curved surface of the tooth, and the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 to be aligned with the tooth row. followability can be further improved.
- FIG. 36 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 26, and is a partial sectional view of the mouthpiece portion 220 according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 36 shows the behavior when the connecting portion 280 is compressed in the meshing direction.
- illustration of the third brush portion 281 is omitted.
- the connecting portion 280 of this embodiment is made of an elastic body such as rubber, for example.
- the connecting portion 280 is elastically deformed in the depth direction according to the deformation in the meshing direction.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the sixth embodiment.
- the connecting portion 280 when the connecting portion 280 is compressed in the meshing direction, it is elastically deformed in a direction extending at least in the depth direction.
- a force is applied to the connecting portion 280 in the direction of shrinking at least in the depth direction using the elastic restoring force as an urging force, as shown by the double-dashed arrow in FIG. That is, when the compression in the meshing direction is reduced, a biasing force is applied to the first support body 231 in a direction that is outside in the depth direction and fits the first brush portion 241 inside the tooth row.
- FIGS. 37 to 39 a thirteenth embodiment of the mouthpiece section 220 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39.
- the same elements as those of the sixth embodiment shown in FIGS. 25 to 30 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.
- FIGS. 37 and 38 are schematic cross-sectional views taken along line BB in FIG. 26, and are partial cross-sectional views of the mouthpiece portion 220 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.
- illustration of the third brush portion 281 is omitted.
- the connecting portion 280 of this embodiment has a gap 282, as shown in FIG. 37.
- the void 282 has a rectangular cross section and is formed inside the connecting portion 280 in the meshing direction.
- the void 282 is located at the center of the connecting portion 280 in the depth direction.
- the dimension in the depth direction of the void 282 is shorter than the dimension in the depth direction of the connecting portion 280.
- the void 282 penetrates the connecting portion 280 in the ⁇ direction.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the sixth embodiment.
- the connecting portion 280 above the gap 282 deforms downward, as indicated by the dashed double-dashed arrow.
- the upper side of the first support 231 than the connecting part 280 is inclined outward in the depth direction, and the upper side of the second supporting body 261 is inclined inward in the depth direction so that the upper side of the second supporting body 261 is above the connecting part 280.
- the connecting portion 280 when the connecting portion 280 is compressed in the meshing direction, as the connecting portion 280 below the gap 282 deforms upward, the first support
- the lower side of the connecting portion 280 in the second support member 231 is inclined outward in the depth direction, and the lower side of the second support body 261 than the connecting portion 280 is inclined inward in the depth direction.
- the first brush portion 241 and the second brush portion 271 located above the connecting portion 280 approach each other toward the center of the connecting portion 280 in the depth direction, and the By moving the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 toward the center of the connecting part 280 in the depth direction, it is possible to improve the fit to the tooth row and the cleaning power.
- the first hard plate 236 is embedded in the first support body 231
- the second hard plate 266 is embedded in the second support body 261
- the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 are , when compressed in the meshing direction, the upper side and the lower side do not tilt in the depth direction, so as shown by the arrow, they approach horizontally in the direction toward the center of the connecting portion 280 in the depth direction. This improves the fit to the row of teeth and the cleaning power.
- FIGS. 40 to 43 a fourteenth embodiment of the mouthpiece section 220 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 43.
- the same elements as those of the sixth embodiment shown in FIGS. 25 to 30 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.
- FIGS. 40 and 41 are schematic cross-sectional views taken along line BB in FIG. 26, and are partial cross-sectional views of the mouthpiece portion 220 according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention.
- illustration of the third brush portion 281 is omitted.
- the connecting portion 280 of this embodiment has a groove portion 283, as shown in FIG.
- the groove portions 283 are formed at the same position in the depth direction on the upper surface and the lower surface of the connecting portion 280, respectively.
- a plurality of grooves 283 (two in FIG. 40) are arranged on the upper surface and the lower surface of the connecting portion 280 at intervals on both sides of the center of the connecting portion 280 in the depth direction.
- the groove portion 283 has a V-shaped cross section and opens on the surface of the connecting portion 280 .
- the groove portion 283 extends in the ⁇ direction and is formed over the entire connecting portion 280 in the ⁇ direction.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the sixth embodiment.
- the connecting portion 280 is divided into three blocks B in the depth direction by the grooves 283 because a plurality of grooves 283 are formed on both sides in the meshing direction and at the same position in the depth direction. Since the connecting portion 280 has low bending strength in the region where the groove portion 283 is formed, each block B is deformable relative to the adjacent block B around an axis extending in the ⁇ direction centered on the bottom of the groove portion 283. .
- the blocks B on both sides in the depth direction are located above the central block B. transforms into At this time, the lower sides of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 are separated from each other, so that the upper sides of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 are closer to each other. Thereby, the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 located above the connecting part 280 can particularly improve the fit to the tooth row and the cleaning power.
- a gap 282 is provided with respect to the connecting portion 280 shown in FIG.
- the void 282 has a rectangular cross section and is formed at the center inside the connecting portion 280 in the meshing direction.
- the length of the gap 282 in the depth direction is approximately the same as the length of the connecting portion 280 in the depth direction.
- the upper and lower blocks B located at the center in the depth direction deform in the direction of sinking toward the gap 282, as shown in FIG. 43. .
- the blocks B located on both sides in the depth direction tilt toward the center in the depth direction on the upper and lower sides.
- the three blocks B located on the upper side curve in a curved shape convexing downward, and the three blocks B located on the lower side curve in a curved shape convexing upward.
- the three blocks B curved in a curved shape have shorter maximum dimensions in the depth direction on the upper side and the lower side.
- the three blocks B located on the upper side and the three blocks B located on the lower side are vertically symmetrical. Therefore, the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 approach each other in the depth direction without being tilted. Thereby, the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 can improve the fit to the tooth row and the cleaning power.
- FIG. 44 is a side view of the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 seen from the left side.
- the first hard plate 236 of the embodiment has a recess 237.
- a plurality of recesses 237 are provided at intervals in the ⁇ direction.
- the recess 237 penetrates the first hard plate 236 in the depth direction.
- the second hard plate 266 of this embodiment has a recess 267.
- a plurality of recesses 267 are provided at intervals in the ⁇ direction.
- the recess 267 penetrates the second hard plate 266 in the depth direction.
- the recess 237 and the recess 267 are provided at a position where the dimension in the ⁇ direction, the dimension in the meshing direction, and the dimension in the depth direction change or at an inflection point.
- the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 are connected to the recess 237 and the recess. Since the bending strength at the position where the tooth row 267 is provided changes, the fit of the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271, the cleaning force including the meshing surface, and the vibration transmission can be adjusted depending on the position of the tooth row. can.
- the recess 237 and the recess 267 are not limited to the configuration in which they penetrate the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266 in the depth direction, but may be configured to penetrate in the meshing direction, and the recess 237 and the recess 267 are not limited to the configuration in which they penetrate in the depth direction.
- a configuration may also be adopted in which both a recessed portion and a recessed portion penetrating in the engagement direction are provided.
- the recess 237 and the recess 267 penetrate through the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266, there are also configurations in which the recess 237 and the recess 267 are made thinner without penetrating the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266, and a configuration in which the recess 237 and the recess 267 are made thinner than the first hard plate 236 and the second hard plate 266.
- the recess does not necessarily have to be formed.
- the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 are provided over the entire first support body 231 and the second support body 261 in the ⁇ direction, but this configuration
- the first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 may be arranged intermittently in the ⁇ direction.
- the mouthpiece portion 220 may be provided in only one region of the left and right regions, for example.
- a configuration in which a gap S is provided between the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 in the depth direction is illustrated, but the configuration is not limited to this.
- the first support body 231 and the second support body 261 can be relatively moved independently in both the depth direction and the ⁇ direction, and , a structure may be provided in which a material is provided that allows the tooth rows to mesh.
- first brush part 241 and the second brush part 271 may be filaments integrally molded with the first support body 231 and the second support body 261, respectively, or It may be a bundle of bristles provided on the second support 261, respectively.
- FIG. 45 is a front view of the toothbrush 301.
- the toothbrush 301 is a mouthpiece type toothbrush, and includes a grip portion 310 and a connecting body 320.
- the connecting body 320 will be referred to as a mouthpiece section 320.
- Mouthpiece section 320 is given vibration via grip section 310 .
- a shaft 314 protrudes from the grip section 310 and is connected to a mouthpiece section 320. Note that the shaft 314 protruding from the mouthpiece section 320 may be connected to the grip section 310.
- the mouthpiece section 320 is subjected to vibration from the grip section 310 via the shaft 314.
- the present invention provides a configuration in which a gripping portion 310 manually applies a brushing motion to the mouthpiece portion 320 in up and down, left and right, front and rear directions, and a combination thereof, a configuration in which vibration is manually applied, and a configuration in which a cleaning operation is manually applied to the mouthpiece portion 320 from the gripping portion 310. It is applicable to any configuration in which vibration is applied electrically to the piece portion 320. In this embodiment, a configuration will be described in which the grip portion 310 is provided with an electric drive unit and vibrations generated by driving the electric drive unit are applied to the mouthpiece portion 320.
- the electric drive unit includes a power supply section 311, a vibration element 312, and a control section 313.
- the control unit 313 drives the vibration element 312 using the power from the power supply unit 311.
- the power supply unit 311 includes, for example, a rechargeable battery, a battery, or the like.
- the vibration element 312 is composed of, for example, a piezoelectric element, an electromagnetic acoustic transducer, an unbalanced motor, or the like.
- the vibration generated by the vibration element 312 is a vibration in which the rotation direction is rotated about an axis extending in the depth direction, and the rotation direction is repeatedly reversed at a constant predetermined rotation angle.
- the shaft 314 connected to the electric drive unit in the gripping part 310 vibrates by repeatedly reversing its rotational direction.
- the mouthpiece portion 320 vibrates by repeatedly reversing the direction of rotation.
- the mouthpiece section 320 includes a first brush body 330, a second brush body 360, an adjustment section 350, and a connecting section 380.
- the first brush body 330 is located inside the grip portion 310 in the depth direction.
- the second brush body 360 is located between the grip portion 310 and the first brush body 330 in the depth direction, and is arranged apart from the first brush body 330.
- the second brush body 360 is arranged with a gap S apart from the first brush body 330.
- the gap S is a space that penetrates the mouthpiece portion 320 in the meshing direction.
- the first brush body 330 is located on the tongue side, which is inside the row of teeth.
- the second brush body 360 is located on the buccal side, which is outside the row of teeth.
- the first brush body 330 includes a first support body 331 and a first brush portion 341.
- the first support body 331 supports the base end side of the first brush portion 341.
- the first support body 331 is formed in a U-shape (horseshoe shape) along the circumferential direction centering on the axis J when viewed from above.
- the first support body 331 is open inward.
- the second brush body 360 has a second support body 361 and a second brush part 371.
- the second support body 361 supports the base end side of the second brush portion 371.
- the second support body 361 is formed in a U-shape (horseshoe shape) along the circumferential direction centering on the axis J when viewed from above.
- the second support body 361 is open inward.
- first brush body 330 and the second brush body 360 face the tooth row is not limited to the entire tooth row, but also front teeth (central incisors, lateral incisors), canines, and back teeth (first premolars, second premolars). Only some of the premolars, first molars, and second molars may face each other.
- FIG. 46 is an external perspective view of the mouthpiece portion 320 viewed from inside in the depth direction.
- FIG. 47 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 46.
- the dimension of the first support 331 in the engagement direction is largest on the outside in the depth direction and gradually decreases toward the inside.
- the upper end of the first support body 331 is located at the uppermost side on the outer side in the depth direction, and gradually slopes downward toward the inner side.
- the lower end of the first support body 331 is located at the lowermost side on the outer side in the depth direction, and gradually slopes upward toward the inner side.
- the dimension of the second support body 361 in the meshing direction is largest on the outside in the depth direction, and gradually decreases toward the inside.
- the upper end of the second support body 361 is located at the uppermost side on the outer side in the depth direction, and gradually slopes downward toward the inner side.
- the lower end of the second support body 361 is located at the lowermost side on the outer side in the depth direction, and gradually slopes upward toward the inner side.
- the maximum dimension in the meshing direction of the second support body 361 on the outside in the depth direction is larger than the maximum dimension in the meshing direction of the first support body 331 on the outside in the depth direction.
- the minimum dimension in the meshing direction of the second support 361 on the inside in the depth direction is larger than the minimum dimension in the meshing direction of the first support 331 on the inside in the depth direction.
- the dimension of the second support 361 in the meshing direction is larger than the dimension of the first support 331 in the meshing direction throughout the depth direction.
- FIG. 48 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 45.
- the first brush portions 341 are provided on the first support body 331 at intervals in the vertical direction.
- the first brush portions 341 are provided on the upper end side and the lower end side of the first support body 331, respectively.
- the first brush portion 341 extends outward in the depth direction from the outer brush surface 331a of the first support body 331 in the depth direction.
- the brush surface 331a has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in an outwardly convex direction when viewed from above.
- the toothbrush 301 uses the first brush portion 341 arranged along the row of teeth and is intended to be moved manually or electrically, so the brush surface 331a may be curved. Therefore, the first brush portion 341 can be placed along the lingual side of the tooth row, and cleaning performance and fitting performance can be improved. Further, it is possible to maximize the installation area of the first brush portion 341, and in the case of an electric drive, it can contribute to improving vibration efficiency and cleaning power.
- the first brush section 341 includes first brush sections 341A, 341B, and 341C, and first brush sections 341D, 341E, and 341F.
- the first brush parts 341A, 341B, 341C and the first brush parts 341D, 341E, 341F extend outward in the depth direction from the brush surface 331a.
- the first brush portion 341A extends outward from the upper end of the brush surface 331a.
- the first brush portion 341B extends outward from a position below the first brush portion 341A.
- the first brush portion 341C extends outward from a position below the first brush portion 341B.
- the first brush portion 341D extends outward from the lower end of the brush surface 331a.
- the first brush portion 341E extends outward from a position above the first brush portion 341D.
- the first brush portion 341F extends outward from a position above the first brush portion 341E.
- the first brush portion 341 including the first brush portions 341A, 341B, 341C and the first brush portions 341D, 341E, 341F are spaced apart from each other throughout the circumferential direction. There are multiple locations.
- the first brush part 341 has an inclination angle closer to the meshing surface K when viewed from the side parallel to the meshing surface K. It is small, and the farther from the meshing surface K, the larger it is. Specifically, the inclination angle of the first brush parts 341A, 341D, which are close to the gum side and farthest from the engagement surface K, is larger than the inclination angle of the first brush parts 341B, 341E and the first brush parts 341C, 341F. The angle of inclination of the first brush parts 341C, 341F closest to the engagement surface K is smaller than the angle of inclination of the first brush parts 341A, 341D and the first brush parts 341B, 341E.
- the dimensions of the tooth surfaces in the meshing direction are the arrangement pitch in the meshing direction at the roots of the first brush portions 341A and 341C, and the arrangement in the meshing direction at the roots of the first brush portions 341D and 341F. Since it is often larger than the pitch, if the inclination angles of the first brush parts 341A to 341C and 341D to 341F are the same, the tips of the first brush parts 341A to 341C and 341D to 341F cover the entire tooth surface in the meshing direction. It becomes difficult to do.
- the inclination angle increases sequentially from the first brush part 341C to the first brush part 341A and from the first brush part 341F to the first brush part 341D, even when the mouth is slightly open,
- the first brush parts 341C and 341F can be fitted to the tip of the teeth on the tongue side, and the first brush parts 341A and 341D can be fitted to the gum side on the tongue side.
- the first brush part 341A and the first brush part 341B, the first brush part 341B and the first brush part 341C, the first brush part 341D and the first brush part 341E, and the first brush part 341E and the first brush are adjacent in the meshing direction.
- the arrangement pitches of the portions 341F in the circumferential direction are shifted by, for example, a half pitch. That is, when viewed in the direction facing the brush surface 331a, the first brush parts 341A, 341B, 341C and the first brush parts 341D, 341E, 341F are arranged in a staggered manner, respectively.
- the gap between the first brush parts 341 can be reduced, and the fit to the tooth surface and the cleanability are improved. can be improved.
- the second brush portion 371 is provided on the second support body 361 with an interval in the vertical direction.
- the second brush portions 371 are provided on the upper end side and the lower end side of the second support body 361, respectively.
- the second brush portion 371 extends inward in the depth direction from the brush surface 61a on the inside in the depth direction of the second support body 361.
- the brush surface 61a has a portion that is curved along the circumferential direction in an outwardly convex direction when viewed from above.
- the toothbrush 301 uses the second brush part 371 arranged along the row of teeth and is intended to be moved manually or electrically, so the brush surface 61a may be curved. Therefore, the second brush portion 371 can be placed along the buccal side of the tooth row, and cleaning performance and fitting performance can be improved. Further, it is possible to maximize the installation area of the second brush portion 371, and in the case of an electric drive, it can contribute to improving vibration efficiency and cleaning power.
- the second brush section 371 includes second brush sections 371A, 371B, 371C, and 371D, and second brush sections 371E, 371F, 371G, and 371H.
- the second brush parts 371A, 371B, 371C, 371D and the second brush parts 371E, 371F, 371G, 371H extend inward in the depth direction from the brush surface 361a.
- the second brush portion 371A extends outward from the upper end of the brush surface 361a.
- the second brush portion 371B extends inward from a position below the second brush portion 371A.
- the second brush portion 371C extends inward from a position below the second brush portion 371B.
- the second brush portion 371D extends inward from a position below the second brush portion 371C.
- the second brush portion 371E extends inward from the lower end of the brush surface 361a.
- the second brush portion 371F extends inward from a position above the second brush portion 371E.
- the second brush portion 371G extends inward from a position above the second brush portion 371F.
- the second brush portion 371H extends inward from a position above the second brush portion 371G.
- the second brush portion 371 including the second brush portions 371A, 371B, 371C, 371D and the second brush portions 371E, 371F, 371G, 371H extends over the entire circumferential direction, respectively. Multiple locations are provided at intervals.
- the angle of inclination with respect to the meshing surface K is smaller as it is closer to the meshing surface K, and larger as it is farther from the meshing surface K.
- the inclination angles of the second brush parts 371A and 371E which are close to the gum side and farthest from the engagement surface K, are larger than the inclination angles of the second brush parts 371B to 371D and 371F to 371H.
- the inclination angles of the second brush parts 371C, 371D, 371G, and 371H close to the meshing surface K are smaller than the inclination angles of the second brush parts 371A, 371B and the second brush parts 371E, 371F.
- the inclination angles of the second brush parts 371C and 371D are the same, and the inclination angles of the second brush parts 371G and 371H are the same.
- the configuration may be such that the angle of inclination of the second brush part 371D is smaller than the angle of inclination of the second brush part 371C, and the angle of inclination of the second brush part 371H is smaller than the angle of inclination of the second brush part 371G.
- the dimensions of the tooth surfaces in the meshing direction are the arrangement pitch in the meshing direction at the roots of the second brush portion 371A and the second brush portion 371D, and the arrangement in the meshing direction at the roots of the second brush portion 371E and the second brush portion 371H. Since it is often larger than the pitch, if the inclination angles of the second brush parts 371A to 371D and 371E to 371H are the same, the tips of the second brush parts 371A to 371D and 371E to 371H cover the entire tooth surface in the meshing direction. It becomes difficult to do.
- the second brush parts 371C, 371D, 371G, and 371H can be made to fit on the tooth tip side on the tongue side, and the second brush parts 371A and 371E can be made to fit on the gum side on the tongue side.
- the second brush part 371A and the second brush part 371B, the second brush part 371B and the second brush part 371C, the second brush part 371C and the second brush part 371D, and the second brush part 371E and the second brush are adjacent in the meshing direction.
- the arrangement pitches of the portion 371F, the second brush portion 371F and the second brush portion 371G, and the second brush portion 371G and the second brush portion 371H in the circumferential direction are shifted by, for example, a half pitch.
- the second brush parts 371A, 371B, 371C, 371D and the second brush parts 371E, 371F, 371G, 371H are arranged in a staggered manner, respectively.
- the gap between the second brush parts 371 can be reduced and the fit to the tooth surface can be improved. Improves performance and cleanability.
- FIG. 49 is a front view of the first brush body 330, the second brush body 360, and the connecting portion 380 excluding the connecting portions with the first brush portion 341, the second brush portion 371, and the grip portion 310.
- the adjustment unit 350 can adjust the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 in an unloaded state.
- the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 are in an unloaded state, which means that in addition to the load caused by gravity and the distance adjustment operation by the user, no load such as load from the dentition or cheeks in the oral cavity is applied. state.
- the adjustment section 350 includes a fitting protrusion 351 and a fitting cylinder section 356.
- the fitting protrusion 351 is provided on the first support body 331.
- the fitting protrusion 351 protrudes outward from the first support 331 and is located in the gap S.
- the fitting cylinder portion 356 is provided at a position facing the fitting protrusion 351 in the depth direction of the second support body 361.
- the fitting cylinder portion 356 protrudes inward from the second support body 361 and is located in the gap S.
- FIG. 50 is a front view of the fitting protrusion 351 and the fitting cylinder part 356 separated in the depth direction.
- the fitting protrusion 351 has a pair of fitting pieces 352, as shown in FIG.
- the pair of fitting pieces 352 extend outward in parallel and spaced apart in the circumferential direction.
- the pair of fitting pieces 352 can be elastically deformed in the circumferential direction to move away from and approach each other.
- the pair of fitting pieces 352 each have a protrusion 353 and a slope 354.
- the protrusion 353 protrudes outward from the fitting piece 352 in the circumferential direction.
- the protrusion 353 tapers toward the distal end.
- the slope 354 is located at the outer tip of the fitting piece 352.
- the slope 354 extends from the outer end of the fitting piece 352 in the depth direction toward the inner side in the depth direction and toward the outer side in the circumferential direction and connects to the tip of the protrusion 353 .
- the fitting cylindrical portion 356 has a square cylindrical shape extending inward from the second support body 361.
- the circumferential distance W3 on the inner surface 357 of the fitting cylinder portion 356 is smaller than the distance W1 between the tips of the pair of protrusions 353, and larger than the distance W2 between the outer ends of the pair of slopes 354 in the depth direction.
- FIG. 51 is a front view of the fitting protrusion 351 inserted into the fitting cylinder 356.
- the fitting protrusion 351 can be inserted into the fitting cylinder 356 from inside in the depth direction.
- the slope 354 contacts the inner end of the inner surface 357 in the depth direction, so that the fitting protrusion 351 forms a pair as shown by the arrow in FIG.
- the fitting pieces 352 are elastically deformed in a direction in which they approach each other in the circumferential direction, and the protrusions 353 are inserted into the fitting cylinder portion 356 in a state in which they fit into contact with the inner surface 357 from the inside in the circumferential direction.
- the elastic restoring force of the fitting piece 352 that is elastically deformed and inserted into the fitting cylinder part 356 acts as a biasing force that presses the inner surface 357 of the fitting cylinder part 356 outward in the circumferential direction via the protrusion 353. do.
- the relative positional relationship in the depth direction between the fitting protrusion 351 and the fitting cylinder part 356 is such that a force (load) exceeding the frictional force between the protrusion 353 and the inner surface 357 is applied, and the fitting protrusion 351 is fitted. It can be adjusted by moving it relative to the cylindrical portion 356.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 in an unloaded state can be adjusted.
- the fitting protrusion 351 and the fitting cylinder part 356 are slidable in the depth direction with the protrusion 353 in contact with the inner surface 357, the depth direction of the first support 331 and the second support 361 is It is possible to continuously change the distance according to the load applied to the adjustment unit 350 during the distance adjustment operation in the depth direction. Therefore, the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 in an unloaded state can be adjusted to an arbitrary value.
- the distance between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 can be adjusted.
- the fit can be improved.
- the mouse since it is possible to continuously change the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 according to the load, in addition to the distance adjustment operation, the mouse When the piece part 320 is installed in the oral cavity, the distance changes due to the load associated with brushing, so that the fit to the dentition can be further improved.
- the adjustment section 350 preferably has a third brush section 358 on at least one of the upper side and the lower side in the meshing direction.
- third brush portions 358 are provided on both the upper and lower sides of the adjustment portion 350 in the meshing direction.
- the third brush portions 358 are provided on the upper and lower sides of the fitting cylinder portion 356, respectively.
- the third brush portion 358 has a chevron-shaped bristle length profile with a peak at the midpoint in the depth direction. Since the third brush portion 358 has a chevron-shaped bristle length profile, it has a profile that fits the meshing surfaces of the teeth, improving cleaning power.
- the third brush portion 358 is arranged, for example, at a position facing the front teeth. Since the third brush part 358 is arranged at a position facing the front teeth and protrudes upward and downward, it is possible for the first brush part 341 and the second brush part 371 to effectively clean the engagement surfaces of the front teeth that are difficult to reach. can.
- one or more adjustment parts 350 can be provided at any circumferential position, it is preferable to arrange them at least at the center position of the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 in the circumferential direction.
- the circumferential center position refers to an area within ⁇ 10% of the maximum width H of the first support 331 and the second support 361 with respect to the circumferential center.
- the maximum width H is the maximum dimension of the first support 331 and the second support 361 in the tangential direction at the center in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front.
- the adjustment portion 350 is located at the center of the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 in the circumferential direction. By arranging it at the position, when the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 at the center position is adjusted, the distance in the depth direction differs from the distance adjusted at the center position according to the position in the circumferential direction. You can adjust the distance.
- the shaft 314 that applies vibration to the first support 331 and the second support 361 is located in the same area as the adjustment section 350, and the first support Since vibrations to the body 331 and the second support body 361 are difficult to attenuate, cleaning power can be improved.
- the adjustment portion 350 is disposed at the center position in the circumferential direction, it is preferable that the shaft 314 reach the first support body 331 from the viewpoint of enhancing the above effect.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 obtained by the adjustment part 350 is 4 mm or more when the adjustment part 350 is arranged at the center position in the circumferential direction, which is the position of the front teeth. , preferably 18 mm or less. If the amount of distance adjustment by the adjustment unit 350 is less than 4 mm, there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the tooth contacts the tooth and cannot be moved. If the amount of distance adjustment by the adjustment unit 350 exceeds 18 mm, the first support 331 may come into contact with the tongue and the second support 361 may come into contact with the lips, which may impair operability. By setting the amount of distance adjustment by the adjustment unit 350 to 4 mm or more and 18 mm or less, it becomes possible to adjust the brush to fit the tooth arrangement regardless of the length of the brush.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 obtained by the adjustment unit 350 is when the adjustment unit 350 is placed between the front teeth and the back teeth, or when the adjustment unit 350 is placed at the position of the back teeth.
- the length is preferably 7 mm or more and 21 mm or less. If the amount of distance adjustment by the adjustment unit 350 is less than 7 mm, there is a possibility that the tooth may come into contact with the tooth and become unable to be moved. If the amount of distance adjustment by the adjustment unit 350 exceeds 21 mm, the first support 331 may come into contact with the tongue and the second support 361 may come into contact with the lips, which may impair operability.
- the adjustment unit 350 By setting the amount of distance adjustment by the adjustment unit 350 to 7 mm or more and 21 mm or less, it becomes possible to adjust the brush to fit the dentition regardless of the length of the brush. As described above, by having a sufficient amount of distance adjustment for each part where the adjustment part 350 is arranged, it is possible to adapt it to any oral cavity size and improve the fit.
- the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 of this embodiment have different hardnesses as material characteristics.
- the hardness of the first support 331 is preferably greater than the hardness of the second support 361.
- the first support 331 is preferably made of a soft resin having a Shore A hardness of 50 or more and a Shore D hardness of 75 or less.
- the second support 361 is preferably made of a soft resin having a Shore A hardness of 40 or more and a Shore D hardness of 70 or less.
- “Shore A hardness” means the durometer A hardness of plastics measured according to JIS K 7215 or JIS K 6253.
- “Shore D hardness” means durometer type D hardness specified in JIS K 6253.
- the second support 361 located on the outside is made softer than the first support 331.
- the second support body 361 can be deformed and the followability of the second brush part 371 to the tooth row can be improved.
- the change in curvature is small and there is little steric hindrance, so by making the first support 331 located on the inside harder than the second support 361, The followability of the first brush portion 341 on the body 331 to the tooth row can be improved.
- the resistance associated with the movement of the first support 331 and the second support 361 in the ⁇ direction also differs depending on the presence or absence of steric hindrance and the amount of change in curvature.
- the second support 361 located on the outside, where the resistance associated with movement is large, softer than the first support 331, the second support 361 can be easily moved in the ⁇ direction relative to the first support 331.
- the second brush portion 371 can be relatively moved and deformed to improve the followability of the second brush portion 371 to the tooth row.
- the first support body 331 and the second brush body 361 in the first brush body 330 can be The independence of the movement of the second support body 361 increases, making it possible for the first brush part 341 and the second brush part 371 to follow the shape of the tooth row and the brushing operation, and to move the second support body 361 on the buccal and lingual sides of the tooth row. Cleaning power improves by fitting the product.
- the hardness of the first brush part 341 and the second brush part 371 is within the above range, and if the hardness of the soft resin is less than the above lower limit, the scraping force may be insufficient and the mouthpiece part 320 may If it is electric, there will be a lack of vibration transmission and the cleaning function will be reduced.
- the hardness of the soft resin exceeds the above upper limit, the first brush portion 341 and the second brush portion 371 become difficult to bend, resulting in poor fit and poor cleaning performance.
- elastomers can be used as the soft resin constituting the first brush body 330 and the second brush body 360, including polyurethane and silicone.
- Polyurethane tends to have higher tensile strength and mechanical abrasion resistance than other elastomers such as styrene and polyester, so using polyurethane as a soft resin makes it difficult to break even when made thin. , can enable mechanical strength and long-term use.
- Silicone has particularly high heat resistance and chemical resistance, and can reduce quality deterioration when sterilized by boiling or in the presence of toothpaste.
- the dimension L1 in the depth direction of the first support body 331 is preferably 1.5 mm or more and 7 mm or less.
- the depth dimension L2 of the second support body 361 is preferably 1.5 mm or more and 6 mm or less.
- the end in the ⁇ direction is larger than the dimension L2 in the depth direction of the end of the second support 361.
- a dimension L2 in the depth direction of the support body 361 is smaller (thinner) than a dimension L1 in the depth direction of the first support body 331.
- the first support 331 and the second support 361 can move to follow the tooth arrangement shape and brushing operation. . Thereby, the fit of the first brush part 341 and the second brush part 371 to the tooth row and the cleaning power can be improved.
- the depth dimension L2 of the second support body 361 located on the outer side is thinner than the depth direction dimension L1 of the first support body 331 located on the inner side, each can have different movements. It fits both the buccal and lingual sides of the teeth, improving cleaning power.
- the second support 361 on the outer side which has a large change in curvature and also has steric hindrance due to the buccal mucosa, is made thinner and softer than the first support 331 so that it can follow the dentition. It increases.
- the first support body 331 on the inner side which has a small change in curvature, is made thicker than the second support body 361 on the outer side to suppress softness, thereby increasing followability.
- the connecting portion 380 extends in the circumferential direction orthogonal to the meshing direction.
- the connecting portion 380 has a rectangular plate shape when viewed from above.
- the connecting portion 380 connects the first support 331 and the second support 361 in the depth direction.
- the connecting portion 380 connects the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 at the ends in the circumferential direction.
- the connecting portion 380 connects the first support 331 and the second support 361 at a central position in the meshing direction.
- the connecting part 380 has a fourth brush part 381.
- the fourth brush portion 381 has a chevron-shaped bristle length profile with a peak at the midpoint in the depth direction. Since the fourth brush portion 381 has a chevron-shaped bristle length profile, it has a profile that fits the meshing surfaces of the teeth, improving cleaning power.
- the fourth brush portion 381 is arranged, for example, at a position facing the back teeth. Since the fourth brush part 381 is arranged at a position facing the back teeth and protrudes upward and downward, the first brush part 341 and the second brush part 371 can effectively clean the occlusal surfaces of the back teeth that are difficult to reach. can.
- the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 have regions that are connected by the connecting portion 380 among the lengths in the ⁇ direction that are opposite to each other in the depth direction, and are not separated from each other in the depth direction. Areas that are not covered are spaced apart in the depth direction. That is, the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 have regions separated from each other in the depth direction. A gap S is formed in a region where the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 are separated from each other.
- a gap S which is a separation area
- the movement (position adjustment) of the adjustment section 350 is not inhibited, and the distance adjustment is convenient for the user. It becomes easier.
- the distance between the separation areas is variable to follow the movement of the adjustment section 350, the fit is further improved.
- one of the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 can move according to the shape of the tooth row and the brushing operation without being restrained by the other, and the first brush portion 341 and the second support body 361 can move according to the tooth row shape and the brushing operation.
- the fit and cleaning power of the second brush portion 371 can be improved.
- the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 can each vibrate independently, each can improve the fit to the tooth row and improve the cleaning power. Furthermore, since it can be operated left and right with the mouth closed, drooling can be prevented.
- the gap S which is the area where the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 are separated in the depth direction, is the area in the ⁇ direction where the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 face each other in the depth direction, as shown in FIG. If the length is L11 and the length of the area where the first support 331 and the second support 361 are separated in the depth direction is L12, then the ratio of the length L12 to the length L11 is 30% or more and 70%. It is preferable that it is below.
- the first support 331 At least one of the second support body 361 and the second support body 361 follows and becomes difficult to move, resulting in a decrease in the distance adjustment function.
- the ratio of the length L12 to the length L11 exceeds 70%, the area where the adjustment section 350 exists becomes small, the area where the distance adjustment by the adjustment section 350 affects is limited in the circumferential direction, and the distance adjustment function deteriorates. . Furthermore, the vibration transmission rate between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 becomes insufficient.
- the connecting part 380 is not placed at either end in the circumferential direction and the adjustment part 350 is placed at the center position in the circumferential direction, or a configuration in which the connecting part 380 is placed in the center position in the circumferential direction and the adjusting part 350 is placed at both ends in the circumferential direction.
- a configuration in which the adjusting portion 350 is disposed at the circumferential center position and a configuration in which the adjusting portion 350 is disposed at the circumferential center position and at both ends in the circumferential direction without disposing the connecting portion 380 may be selected.
- the connecting part 380 at the last molar position is connected to the first support body 331 in the adjusting part 350.
- the first support 331 or the second support 361 can be stretched to fit the tooth row.
- the separation area between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 is By ensuring the maximum amount, the movement of the adjustment section 350 will not be hindered, and the distance between the circumferences can be easily varied to follow the movement of the adjustment section 350, making it possible to further improve the fit. .
- the connecting part 380 is arranged at the center position in the circumferential direction and the adjusting part 350 is arranged at both ends in the circumferential direction, a spaced area can be secured around the adjusting part 350, and the operation in the adjusting part 350 is obstructed.
- the distance between the peripheries can be easily varied so as to follow the movement of the adjustment section 350, making it possible to further improve the fit.
- the mouthpiece part 320 does not wobble and the shape after distance adjustment can be stabilized. .
- the region other than the adjusting portion 350 becomes the separation region. Therefore, a sufficient separation area can be secured around the adjustment section 350, the operation in the adjustment section 350 is not obstructed, and the distance between the surroundings can be easily varied so as to follow the operation in the adjustment section 350, so that the fit is improved. It becomes possible to further enhance sexuality.
- the mouthpiece part 320 since the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 are connected at the center position in the circumferential direction by the adjustment part 350, the mouthpiece part 320 does not wobble and the shape after distance adjustment can be stabilized. . Furthermore, the distance adjustment function in the depth direction and the direction of the maximum width H described above can be maximized.
- the adjustment part 350 that can adjust the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 in an unloaded state is provided.
- the adjustment part 350 that can adjust the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 in an unloaded state is provided.
- the first support 331 is provided with the fitting protrusion 351 and the second support 361 is provided with the fitting cylinder 356, but the structure is not limited to this, and the first A structure may be adopted in which the support body 331 is provided with the fitting cylinder portion 356 and the second support body 361 is provided with the fitting protrusion 351.
- FIG. 52 is a front view of the mouthpiece section 320 according to the seventeenth embodiment.
- illustrations of the connection points with the first brush part 341, the second brush part 371, and the grip part 310 are omitted.
- the mouthpiece section 320 includes a first hard plate 336 provided on the first brush body 330 and a second hard plate 366 provided on the second brush body 360. , has at least one.
- the mouthpiece section 320 according to the present embodiment includes both the first hard plate 336 and the second hard plate 366, but may have a configuration in which only one of them is provided.
- the first hard plate 336 is provided on the first support body 331 of the first brush body 330 along the ⁇ direction.
- the first rigid plate 336 is embedded in the first support 331 .
- the first hard plate 336 is made of a harder resin than the first brush body 330.
- the first hard plate 336 applies tension to the first support 331 toward the outside, which is the other side in the depth direction, when a load is applied to the first support 331 inward, which is the other side in the depth direction. .
- the first support body 331 maintains its basic U-shape and is assisted to follow the shape of the tooth row, thereby improving the fit and cleaning power of the first brush portion 341, and furthermore, It's easier to get inside.
- the first hard plate 336 embedded in the first support body 331 is the same as the shape of the first support body 331 without a load, the first hard plate 336 has a U-shape that is the basis of the first support body 331.
- a force is applied via the first support body 331 to cause elastic deformation inward in the depth direction, an elastic restoring force is applied outward in the depth direction.
- the first support body 331 when the unloaded first hard plate 336 has a larger radius of curvature than the shape of the first hard plate 336 embedded in the first support body 331, the first support body 331 The force applies tension outward in the depth direction. Therefore, the first support body 331 is difficult to bend inward in the depth direction, and easy to bend outward in the depth direction. That is, the first support body 331 has anisotropy regarding the bending property in the depth direction.
- the second hard plate 366 is provided on the second support body 361 of the second brush body 360 along the ⁇ direction.
- the second rigid plate 366 is embedded in the second support 361.
- the second hard plate 366 is made of a harder resin than the second brush body 360.
- the second hard plate 366 applies tension to the second support body 361 inward, which is one side in the depth direction, when a load is applied to the second support body 361 in the outside, which is the other side in the depth direction. .
- the second support body 361 maintains its basic U-shape and is assisted to follow the shape of the tooth row, which improves the fit and cleaning power of the second brush part 371, and further improves the oral cavity. It's easier to get inside.
- the second hard plate 366 embedded in the second support body 361 When the shape of the second hard plate 366 embedded in the second support body 361 is the same as the shape of the second support body 361 with no load, the second hard plate 366 has a U-shape that is the basis of the second support body 361. When the shape is maintained and a force is applied via the second support body 361 to cause elastic deformation outward in the depth direction, an elastic restoring force is applied to the inner side in the depth direction.
- the second support 361 can The force applies tension inward in the depth direction. Therefore, the second support body 361 is difficult to bend outward in the depth direction, and easy to bend inward in the depth direction.
- the adjustment unit 350 allows the adjustment between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361. 361, the vicinity of the tip of the first hard plate 336 or the second hard plate 366, even if the part of the first support 331 or the second support 361 is far from the adjustment part 350. This makes it easier to extend the distance adjustment function. Furthermore, a state in which vibration damping is suppressed in order toward the shaft 314, the second support body 361 (second hard plate 366), the adjustment part 350 and the connecting part 380, and the first support body 331 (first hard plate 336) This makes it possible to improve the cleaning power of the dentition.
- the hardness of the first hard plate 336 and the second hard plate 366 is preferably 50 or more in Shore A hardness and 75 or less in Shore D hardness. Further, the hardness of the first hard plate 336 is preferably greater than the hardness of the second hard plate 366.
- the hardness of the first hard plate 336 and the second hard plate 366 is preferably 50 or more in Shore A hardness and 75 or less in Shore D hardness.
- the hardness of the first hard plate 336 is preferably greater than the hardness of the second hard plate 366.
- the dimensions in the depth direction of the first hard plate 336 and the second hard plate 366 are preferably 0.5 mm or more and 2.0 mm or less.
- the depth dimension of the first hard plate 336 is preferably larger than the depth dimension of the second hard plate 366.
- the material constituting the first hard plate 336 and the second hard plate 366 is preferably a material that can easily achieve both strength and appropriate tension, such as silicone, urethane, acrylic, copper plate, stainless steel, etc. Among these, materials other than stainless steel are more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesiveness and recycling.
- the fitting cylindrical portion 356 of the adjustment portion 350 has a fitting recess 368 on the inner surface 357.
- the fitting recesses 368 are provided in pairs at the same position in the depth direction on the inner surface 357 located on both sides in the circumferential direction.
- the fitting recesses 368 are recessed outward from the inner surface 357 in the circumferential direction.
- a plurality of pairs (four pairs in FIG. 53) of fitting recesses 368 that form pairs at the same position in the depth direction are provided at regular intervals in the depth direction.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the sixteenth embodiment.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support 331 and the second support 361 is adjusted according to the position in the depth direction of the fitting recess 368. adjusted to the value.
- the fitting protrusion 351 in which the protrusion 353 fits into the fitting recess 368 in the depth direction the pair of fitting pieces 352 are elastically deformed in a direction in which they approach each other in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion 353 Fits into inner surface 357. Furthermore, by moving the fitting protrusion 351 in the depth direction, the protrusion 353 is moved from the inside in the circumferential direction by elastic restoring force into the fitting recess 368 that is adjacent in the depth direction to the fitting recess 368 that was previously fitted. Fit together.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 is adjusted according to the position in the depth direction of the newly fitted fitting recess 368, so that the protrusion 353 is first fitted into the fitting recess 368. It will be adjusted to a different value than when it was used. That is, in the adjustment unit 350 of this embodiment, the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 is adjusted in stages.
- the first support body 331 is provided with the fitting protrusion 351 and the second support body 361 is provided with the fitting cylinder part 356.
- the present embodiment is not limited to this structure.
- the first support body 331 may be provided with a fitting cylinder portion 356, and the second support body 361 may be provided with a fitting protrusion 351.
- FIG. 54 a nineteenth embodiment of the mouthpiece section 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 54.
- the same elements as those of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIGS. 45 to 51 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.
- the configuration of the adjustment section 350 is different.
- the adjustment section 350 includes a nut section 351A and a screw shaft 356A.
- the nut portion 351A is fixed to the first support body 331.
- the nut portion 351A has a female thread extending in the depth direction.
- the screw shaft 356A faces the nut portion 351A in the depth direction and extends inward from the second support body 361.
- the screw shaft 356A has a female thread that extends in the depth direction and engages with the female thread of the nut portion 351A.
- the other configurations are the same as those of the sixteenth embodiment.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 can be adjusted to be short.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support 331 and the second support 361 can be adjusted to be longer depending on the product of the rotation speed and the screw pitch. Can be done.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 can be adjusted in stages according to the product of the rotation speed and the screw pitch.
- the first support body 331 is provided with the nut part 351A
- the second support body 361 is provided with the screw shaft 356A
- a configuration may be adopted in which the screw shaft 356A is provided and the second support body 361 is provided with the nut portion 351A.
- the screw shaft 356A may extend inward from the grip portion 310 through the second support 361 and be engaged with a nut portion 351A fixed to the first support 331.
- the adjustment section 350 has a cylindrical expandable section 356B.
- the cylindrical extensible portion 356B has a plurality of (four in FIG. 55) cylindrical bodies 367 arranged in the depth direction and having different diameters.
- a cylindrical body 367 on the proximal end side having the largest diameter is fixed to the second support body 361.
- a cylindrical body 367 on the distal end side having the smallest diameter is fixed to the first support body 331.
- a cylinder 367 with a larger diameter has a cylinder 367 with a smaller diameter (referred to as a small cylinder) inside the cylinder 367 (referred to as a small cylinder) in the depth direction. It is inserted from the outside and protrudes inward.
- the outer circumferential surface of the small cylindrical body fits into the inner circumferential surface of the large cylindrical body so as to be relatively movable in the depth direction.
- the maximum length in the depth direction when all the cylindrical bodies 367 have moved outward in the depth direction is the minimum distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361
- the maximum length in the depth direction when all the cylindrical bodies 367 move inward in the depth direction and are locked to adjacent cylindrical bodies 367 is the maximum distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361.
- the adjustment section 350 adjusts the distance in the depth direction between the first support 331 and the second support 361 by the frictional force between the outer peripheral surface of the small cylinder and the inner peripheral surface of the large cylinder in the cylindrical extensible section 356B. Can be set. Further, the adjustment unit 350 can adjust the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 to an arbitrary value by moving the cylindrical body 367 in the depth direction in the cylindrical extensible part 356B.
- the adjustment section 350 can continuously change the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 according to the load applied to the adjustment section 350 during the distance adjustment operation in the depth direction. be. Further, in this embodiment, since it is possible to continuously change the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 according to the load, in addition to the distance adjustment operation, the mouse When the piece portion 320 is installed in the oral cavity, the distance changes due to the load associated with brushing, so that the fit to the dentition can be further improved.
- the cylindrical body 367 on the distal end side having the smallest diameter is fixed to the first support body 331, and the cylindrical body 367 on the proximal side having the largest diameter is fixed to the second support body 361.
- the configuration is not limited to this, and the cylindrical body 367 on the proximal end side having the maximum diameter is fixed to the first support body 331, and the cylindrical body 367 on the distal side having the minimum diameter is fixed to the second support body 361. It may also be a configuration.
- the cylindrical extensible portion 356B extends inwardly from the grip portion 310 through the second support 361, and the cylindrical body 367 on the tip side having the smallest diameter is fixed to the first support 331. Good too.
- a configuration is illustrated in which the adjustment section 350 is provided that can actively adjust the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 in the no-load state, but in addition to the adjustment section 350,
- a passive adjustment part is provided in which the distance in the depth direction between the first support 331 and the second support 361 is passively adjusted by the load associated with brushing when the mouthpiece part 320 is installed in the oral cavity. There may be.
- the passive adjustment unit for example, a configuration using an elastic deformable body fixed to the first support body 331 and the second support body 361, a configuration using a first slide body fixed to the first support body 331, and a configuration using the second support body 361
- An example is a configuration using a second slide body fixed to the second slide body.
- the elastic deformable body there are configurations that use members made of materials such as urethane and rubber, configurations that use springs, and configurations that move from the inner side to the outer side along the depth direction and from the outer side to the inner side.
- An example is a configuration using a bellows cylinder that repeats.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 is passively adjusted by elastically deforming the elastic deformation body in the depth direction due to the load associated with brushing.
- An example of a configuration using an elastically deformable body is that the connecting portion 380 described in the above embodiment is formed of an elastically deformable material.
- the configuration in which the first slide body and the second slide body are used as the passive adjustment section is achieved by providing a convex portion extending in the depth direction on one of the first slide body and the second slide body, and providing a concave portion extending in the depth direction on the other.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 is passively adjusted by sliding the first slide body and the second slide body relative to each other in the depth direction due to the load associated with brushing. Ru.
- the adjustment part 350 is arranged at the center position in the circumferential direction, and to arrange the passive adjustment part at the end part side in the circumferential direction on the molar side.
- the distance between the first support 331 and the second support 361 changes depending on the depression between the teeth, so arranging the passive adjustment section on the molar side improves the fit to the dentition.
- the dents between the teeth are small and the source of vibration is close, so by arranging the adjustment section 350 on the front tooth side, vibrations can be transmitted more easily and the cleaning power can be improved.
- the distance in the depth direction between the first support body 331 and the second support body 361 is used together with the adjustment section 350 that can actively adjust the distance, and the passive adjustment section that can passively adjust the distance
- the above-mentioned implementation is possible.
- An example of the configuration is that an elastic deformable body is provided between at least one of the fitting protrusion 351 and the first support body 331 and between the fitting cylinder part 356 and the second support body 361 described in the section.
- the toothbrush 1, 101, 201, 301 has an electric drive unit in the grip portion 10, 110, 210, 310, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration.
- the toothbrush 1, 101, 201, 301 does not have an electric drive unit in the grip part 10, 110, 210, 310, and the user manually operates the mouthpiece part 20, 120 via the grip part 10, 110, 210, 310. , 220, and 320 may be configured to apply vibration.
- the present invention can be applied to toothbrushes and toothbrush manufacturing methods.
- first brush body 231...first support body, 236...first hard plate, 241...first brush part, 260...second brush body, 261...second support body, 266...second hard plate, 271...second brush part, 280... Connecting part, 301... Toothbrush, 310... Gripping part, 320... Mouthpiece part (connecting body), 3330... First brush body, 331... First support body, 336... First hard plate, 341... First brush part, 350...adjustment part, 358...third brush part, 360...second brush body, 361...second support body, 366...second hard plate, 371...second brush part, 380...connecting part, A1, B1 ...first region (center region), A3, B3...third region (end region), S...gap
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Dentistry (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Brushes (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本願は、2022年06月30日に、日本に出願された特願2022-106249号、2022年06月30日に、日本に出願された特願2022-106010号、2022年12月21日に、日本に出願された特願2022-204420号、および2022年12月27日に、日本に出願された特願2022-209653号、に基づき優先権を主張し、その内容をここに援用する。
また、口腔内の部位ごとにブラシ部を最適化することができず、口腔内全体を一度に磨けるマウスピース型の利点を十分に活かせない。
さらに、支持体もブラシ部と同素材の極力軟質な樹脂材料となる。そのため、使用時に支持体を噛むと支持体が過度に広がりやすくなる。その結果、歯列へのフィット性が損なわれるという問題が生じる。
また、一体成形の関係上、マウスピース部におけるブラシ部の位置関係により、ブラシ配列設計に制約が生じるため、各部位の特徴にあった配列を充てることが困難である。そのため、複数部位を同時に、かつそれぞれの部位に適した方法での清掃ができず、歯垢除去率等の清掃性が低下する。
すなわち、特許文献1に開示された歯ブラシでは、歯の外側に位置するブラシ部と歯の内側に位置するブラシ部とが一体的に動作することから、周長および形状が異なる外側と内側の歯列へのフィット性が損なわれ清掃実感が低下する。
また、例えば、男性と女性、あるいは大人と子供のように、頬側と舌側を結ぶ奥行方向の寸法が異なる歯列の寸法の違いに対応することができず、歯列へのフィット性が損なわれるという問題がある。
これらの問題は、マウスピースが電動で駆動される構成に限られず、歯列全体を一括的に清掃する歯ブラシに共通する。
また、本発明は、清掃実感および清掃性が向上する歯ブラシおよび歯ブラシ製造方法を提供することを第2の目的とする。
また、本発明は、歯列への高いフィット性および高い清掃実感が得られる歯ブラシを提供することを第3の目的とする。
また、本発明は、歯列へのフィット性を向上させる歯ブラシを提供することを第4の目的とする。
[1]把持部と、前記把持部に連結される連結体と、を有し、前記連結体は、第1成形体であるブラシ部と、前記第1成形体とは異なる第2成形体であり、噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って前記ブラシ部を支持する支持体と、を有し、前記ブラシ部は、土台部と、前記土台部から延びるフィラメントと、前記土台部に設けられ前記支持体と結合される結合部と、を有する歯ブラシ。
[2]前記ブラシ部は、前記周方向と、前記噛合方向と、前記周方向と前記噛合方向とに直交する奥行き方向と、の少なくとも一方向に複数個配列される、[1]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[3]前記ブラシ部の少なくとも1つは、前記土台部が前記周方向に沿って湾曲する、[2]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[4]前記ブラシ部の少なくとも1つは、ショアA硬度40以上、ショアD硬度70以下の軟質樹脂で形成され、前記土台部の前記奥行方向の厚さは、1mm以上、5mm以下である、[2]または[3]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[5]前記ブラシ部は、前記奥行方向の外側と内側に離れてそれぞれ配置され、
前記外側の前記ブラシ部と前記内側の前記ブラシ部は、前記支持体における前記周方向の中央を含む中央領域と、前記支持体における前記周方向の端部に位置する端部領域と、をそれぞれ有し、前記端部領域において前記外側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記フィラメントと、前記内側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記フィラメントとの距離は、前記中央領域において前記外側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記フィラメントと、前記内側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記フィラメントとの距離よりも大きい、[2]から[4]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[6]前記フィラメントは、前記土台部のブラシ面から延び、前記ブラシ面における前記周方向の両端を結ぶ直線距離は、5mm以上である、[1]から[5]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[7]前記支持体は、前記ブラシ部よりも硬い樹脂で形成されている、[1]から[6]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[8]前記ブラシ部は、前記周方向に配列された複数の前記フィラメントにおける根元部の配列ピッチと毛先部の配列ピッチが異なる箇所を有する、[1]から[7]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[9]前記ブラシ部および前記支持体よりも高い硬度を有し、前記支持体を弾性変形させて前記周方向に沿って湾曲させる弾性部材を有する、[1]から[8]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[10]前記把持部は、振動素子を含む電気駆動ユニットを有し、前記連結体は、前記振動素子の駆動により振動する、[1]から[9]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[11]把持部と、前記把持部に連結される連結体と、を有し、
前記連結体は、第1成形体であるブラシ部と、前記第1成形体とは異なる第2成形体であり、噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って前記ブラシ部を支持する支持体と、を有する歯ブラシのうち、土台部と、前記土台部から延びるフィラメントと、前記土台部に設けられ前記支持体と結合される結合部と、を有する前記ブラシ部を準備することと、前記支持体を準備することと、前記支持体に前記結合部において前記ブラシ部を結合することと、を含む歯ブラシ製造方法。
[12]把持部と、前記把持部に連結される連結体と、を有し、前記連結体は、土台部に用毛の毛束が設けられたブラシ部と、前記土台部とは異なる材料で成形され前記土台部の少なくとも一部を被覆し、噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って前記ブラシ部を支持する支持体と、を有する歯ブラシ。
[13]前記ブラシ部は、前記周方向と、前記周方向と前記噛合方向とに直交する奥行方向と、の少なくとも一方向に複数個配列される、前記[12]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[14]前記ブラシ部は、前記奥行方向の外側と内側に離れてそれぞれ配置され、前記外側の前記ブラシ部と前記内側の前記ブラシ部は、前記支持体における前記周方向の中央を含む中央領域と、前記支持体における前記周方向の端部に位置する端部領域と、をそれぞれを有し、前記端部領域において前記外側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記毛束と、前記内側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記毛束との距離は、前記中央領域において前記外側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記毛束と、前記内側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記毛束との距離よりも大きい、前記[13]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[15]複数の前記毛束が前記周方向に配列された毛束列が前記噛合方向に複数列で設けられ、前記噛合方向の端部に位置する前記毛束列の少なくとも一方における前記毛束は、毛先部が根元部に対して前記端部側に傾斜している、前記[12]から前記[14]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[16]前記ブラシ部は、前記周方向に配列された複数の前記毛束における根元部の配列ピッチと毛先部の配列ピッチが異なる箇所を有する、前記[12]から前記[15]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[17]前記中央領域に位置する前記外側の前記ブラシ部における前記土台部の前記噛合方向の長さをWA1とし、前記端部領域に位置する前記外側の前記ブラシ部における前記土台部の前記噛合方向の長さをWA3とし、前記中央領域に位置する前記内側の前記ブラシ部における前記土台部の前記噛合方向の長さをWB1とし、前記端部領域に位置する前記内側の前記ブラシ部における前記土台部の前記噛合方向の長さをWB3とすると、WA1>WA3およびWB1>WB3の関係をそれぞれ満足する、前記[14]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[18]前記把持部は、振動素子を含む電気駆動ユニットを有し、前記連結体は、前記振動素子の駆動により振動する、前記[12]から前記[17]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[19]把持部と、前記把持部に連結される連結体と、を有し、前記連結体は、土台部に用毛の毛束が設けられたブラシ部と、前記土台部とは異なる材料で成形され前記土台部の少なくとも一部を被覆し、噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って前記ブラシ部を支持する支持体と、を有する歯ブラシのうち、前記ブラシ部を準備することと、前記支持体を準備することと、前記支持体に前記ブラシ部を結合することと、を含む歯ブラシ製造方法。
[20]把持部と、前記把持部に噛合方向と直交する奥行方向の一方側に連結される連結体と、を有し、前記連結体は、前記把持部よりも前記奥行方向の一方側に位置する第1ブラシ体と、前記奥行方向について前記把持部と前記第1ブラシ体との間に位置し、前記第1ブラシ体に対して離れて配置された第2ブラシ体と、を有し、前記第1ブラシ体は、前記噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿ってU字状に形成され、前記奥行方向の一方側に開口する第1支持体と、前記第1支持体から前記奥行方向の他方側に延びる第1ブラシ部と、を有し、前記第2ブラシ体は、前記周方向に沿ってU字状に形成され、前記奥行方向の一方側に開口する第2支持体と、前記第2支持体から前記奥行方向の一方側に延びる第2ブラシ部と、を有し、前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体とは、前記奥行方向と前記周方向の双方に独立して相対移動可能である、歯ブラシ。
[21]前記奥行方向で対向する位置の前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体とは、前記奥行方向の寸法を含む形状特性、または、硬度を含む素材特性が異なる、前記[20]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[22]前記第1支持体における前記奥行方向の寸法は、1.5mm以上、7mm以下であり、前記第2支持体における前記奥行方向の寸法は、1.5mm以上、6mm以下であり、前記第1支持体における前記周方向の端部の前記奥行方向の寸法は、前記第2支持体における前記周方向の端部の前記奥行方向の寸法よりも大きい、前記[21]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[23]前記第1支持体の前記周方向の長さのうち、前記奥行方向について前記第2支持体と離間する領域の長さの割合は、20%以上、70%以下である、
前記[20]から前記[22]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[24]前記第1支持体よりも硬質の樹脂で形成され、前記第1支持体に前記周方向に沿って設けられた第1硬質プレートと、前記第2支持体よりも硬質の樹脂で形成され、前記第2支持体に前記周方向に沿って設けられた第2硬質プレートのうち、少なくとも一方が設けられる、前記[20]から前記[23]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[25]前記第1硬質プレートは、前記第1支持体に前記奥行方向の一方側への負荷が加わったときに、前記第1支持体に前記奥行方向の他方側へのテンションを付与し、前記第2硬質プレートは、前記第2支持体に前記奥行方向の他方側への負荷が加わったときに、前記第2支持体に前記奥行方向の一方側へのテンションを付与する、前記[24]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[26]前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体を前記奥行方向で連結する連結部を有し、前記連結部は、前記噛合方向の変形に応じて前記奥行方向に弾性変形する弾性体である、前記[20]から前記[25]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[27]前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体を前記奥行方向で連結する連結部を有し、前記連結部が前記噛合方向に圧縮されたときに、前記第1支持体および前記第2支持体の少なくとも一部は、前記連結部における前記奥行方向の中央に向かって近づく、前記[20]から前記[26]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[28]把持部と、前記把持部に噛合方向と直交する奥行方向の一方側に連結される連結体と、を有し、前記連結体は、前記把持部よりも前記奥行方向の一方側に位置する第1ブラシ体と、前記奥行方向について前記把持部と前記第1ブラシ体との間に位置し、前記第1ブラシ体に対して離れて配置された第2ブラシ体と、を有し、前記第1ブラシ体は、前記噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って、前記奥行方向の一方側に開口するU字状に形成された第1支持体と、前記第1支持体から前記奥行方向の他方側に延びる第1ブラシ部と、を有し、前記第2ブラシ体は、前記周方向に沿って、前記奥行方向の一方側に開口するU字状に形成された第2支持体と、前記第2支持体から前記奥行方向の一方側に延びる第2ブラシ部と、を有し、無負荷状態における前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体の前記奥行方向の距離を調整可能な調整部を有する、歯ブラシ。
[29]前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体は、前記奥行方向で離間する領域を有する、前記[28]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[30]前記調整部は、前記第1支持体および前記第2支持体における前記周方向の中央位置に少なくとも設けられている、前記[28]または前記[29]に記載の歯ブラシ。
[31]前記第1支持体よりも硬質の樹脂で形成され、前記第1支持体に前記周方向に沿って設けられた第1硬質プレートと、前記第2支持体よりも硬質の樹脂で形成され、前記第2支持体に前記周方向に沿って設けられた第2硬質プレートのうち、少なくとも一方が設けられる、前記[28]から前記[30]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[32]前記調整部は、前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体の前記距離を、前記調整部に対する前記奥行方向の負荷に応じて連続的に変化させることが可能である、前記[28]から前記[31]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
[33]前記調整部は、前記噛合方向の一方側と他方側の少なくとも一方に第3ブラシ部を有する、前記[28]から前記[32]のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。
また、本発明では、清掃実感および清掃性が向上する歯ブラシおよび歯ブラシ製造方法を提供できる。
また、歯列への高いフィット性および高い清掃実感が得られる歯ブラシを提供することができる。
また、歯列へのフィット性を向上させる歯ブラシを提供することができる。
なお、以下の実施形態は、本発明の一態様を示すものであり、この発明を限定するものではなく、本発明の技術的思想の範囲内で任意に変更可能である。また、以下の図面においては、各構成をわかりやすくするために、実際の構造と各構造における縮尺や数等を異ならせている。
図1は、第1実施形態の歯ブラシ1の正面図である。
歯ブラシ1は、マウスピース型の歯ブラシであり、把持部10と連結体20とを有する。以下、連結体20をマウスピース部20と呼ぶ。
連結体20は、把持部10を介して振動を付与される。
把持部10からはシャフト14が突出し、マウスピース部20に連結されている。
なお、マウスピース部20から突出するシャフト14が把持部10に連結される構成であってもよい。
連結体20は、シャフト14を介して把持部10から振動を付与される。
本実施形態では、把持部10に電気駆動ユニットが設けられ、電気駆動ユニットの駆動で生じた振動がマウスピース部20に付与される形態について説明する。
把持部10において電気駆動ユニットに連結されたシャフト14は、回転方向の反転を繰り返して振動する。振動素子12の駆動によりシャフト14が振動することで、マウスピース部20は、回転方向の反転を繰り返して振動する。
マウスピース部20は、ブラシ部30と支持体50とを有する。
図2は、マウスピース部20の第1実施形態におけるブラシ部30の外観斜視図である。図2は、ブラシ部30を奥行方向の内側から見た斜視図である。
図3に示すように、内側上ブラシ部31Aは、土台部41とフィラメント42と結合部43を有する。
土台部41は、断面が矩形状である。図4は、内側上ブラシ部31Aを上側から見た図である。図4に示すように、土台部41は、上側から見て、外側に凸となる向きに周方向に沿って湾曲する箇所を周方向の両側に有する。
本実施形態は、歯列に沿った配列となるブラシ部30を用い、手動または電動でブラシ部30を動かすことを目的とした歯ブラシ1であるため、土台部41が湾曲することで、フィラメント42を歯列の舌側に沿わせることができ、清掃性およびフィット性を向上させることができる。また、ブラシ部30の設置面積を最大化することが可能になり、電動の場合は振動効率の向上および清掃力の向上に寄与できる。
土台部41の長さは、150mmを超えた場合、口腔サイズに対して過度に大きくて操作性やフィット性が低下するため、150mm以下であることが好ましい。
マウスピース部20の曲率半径が5mm未満の場合、支持体50への嵌合が困難になるとともに、フィラメント42の毛先ピッチが過度に変化することで、毛先間で干渉したり、疎になる可能性があるため、複数のブラシ部30を土台部41が湾曲する輪郭に沿って配置することが好ましい。
マウスピース部20の曲率半径が50mmを超える場合は、ストレート形状と見なすことができる。
土台部41の幅よりも長さLを優先して設定することで、歯牙やエリア単位(前歯、奥歯等)における質感およびフィット性を統一できる。
また、土台部41と内側支持体51の結合力が確保できる場合、土台部41の厚さは、0.3~1.2mmであることが好ましい。
土台部41の奥行方向の厚さを1mm以上、5mm以下とすることで、土台部41を安定して嵌合凹部61Aに嵌合させて結合することができる。
土台部41と内側支持体51の結合力が確保できる場合、土台部41の厚さが0.3~1.2mmであることで、体積が過度に大きくならないため、よだれ防止や操作性、およびフィット性向上にも寄与できる。
土台部41の奥行方向の厚さは、内側支持体51の奥行方向の寸法である厚さの50%以上、90%以下であることが好ましい。内側支持体51の奥行方向の厚さは、嵌合凹部61Aの深さと嵌合凹部61Aよりも内側に位置する薄肉部の厚さの合計である。
土台部41の奥行方向の厚さを内側支持体51の奥行方向の厚さの50%以上、90%以下とすることで、土台部41が安定して内側支持体51に固定され、電動の場合は振動の効率的な伝達にも十分な厚さとなる。また、体積が過度に大きくならないため、よだれ防止や操作性、およびフィット性向上にも寄与できる。
根本部と毛先部でフィラメント42間の配列ピッチを異ならせることで、剛性と撓みやすさのバランス調整が可能となり、清掃力が向上する。例えば、フィラメント42における根元部の配列ピッチを小さくすることで毛腰を確保しつつ、毛先部の配列ピッチを大きくすることで、歯間への隙間進入性を確保して清掃機能を向上させることができる。
P2/P1で表される値を1.05以上、2.00以下とすることで、フィラメント42の毛先部に舌側面の歯列に沿う円弧を形成することができ、フィット性が向上する。根元部のピッチを毛先部に比べて密にしているため、毛腰を確保できる。
なお、毛先部と根元部で配列ピッチを異ならせること、およびP2/P1を上記範囲内に調整することは、土台部41の湾曲に従って一義的に決まるものではなく、例えば土台部41が直線状の領域でも実施してよい。
内側上ブラシ部31Bは、主として、上顎側の犬歯および奥歯(小臼歯、大臼歯)における舌側の歯面と対向して配置される。
図5に示すように、内側上ブラシ部31Bの上面は、-θ側に向かうにつれて下側に向かう方向に傾斜している。すなわち、内側上ブラシ部31Bは、噛合方向の寸法である幅が+θ側から-θ側に向かうにつれて薄くなっている。
フィラメント42のうち、フィラメント42Aとフィラメント42Bは、内側上ブラシ部31Bにおける上面の傾斜に沿って、-θ側に向かうにつれて下側に向かう方向に沿って配列されている。フィラメント42のうち、フィラメント42Cは、内側上ブラシ部31Bの幅が-θ側において薄くなっているのに伴いθ方向の中途まで配列されている。そのため、フィラメント42は、+θ側において噛合方向に3列で配列され、-θ側において噛合方向に2列で配列されている。
内側下ブラシ部31Dにおけるフィラメント42Aは、ブラシ面41aにおける下側の端部から外側に延びる。フィラメント42Bは、フィラメント42Aよりも上側の位置から外側に延びる。フィラメント42Cは、フィラメント42Bよりも上側の位置から外側に延びる。歯茎側に近く噛合面Kから最も遠いフィラメント42Aの噛合面Kに対する傾斜角は、フィラメント42Bおよびフィラメント42Cの噛合面Kに対する傾斜角よりも大きい。噛合面Kに最も近いフィラメント42Cの噛合面Kに対する傾斜角は、フィラメント42Aおよびフィラメント42Bの傾斜角よりも小さい。
外側ブラシ部32は、外側上ブラシ部32A、32B、32C、32D、32Eと、外側下ブラシ部32F、32G、32H、32J、32Kとを有する。外側上ブラシ部32A、32B、32C、32D、32Eは、上側に位置し、周方向に沿って上顎側の歯列における頬側の歯面と対向して配置される。外側上ブラシ部32A、32B、32C、32D、32Eは、外側上ブラシ部32Aを中央として、外側上ブラシ部32B、32Cが周方向の右側に間隔をあけて順次配置され、外側上ブラシ部32D、32Eが周方向の左側に間隔をあけて順次配置され、全体としてU字状に設けられている。
また、外側下ブラシ部32F、32G、32H、32J、32Kは、外側上ブラシ部32A、32B、32C、32D、32Eとそれぞれ噛合方向で線対称であるため、外側下ブラシ部32F、32G、32H、32J、32Kの説明を省略する場合がある。
土台部71は、断面が矩形状である。図6は、外側上ブラシ部32Aを上側から見た図である。図6に示すように、土台部71は、上側から見て、外側に凸となる向きに周方向に沿って湾曲する箇所を周方向の両側に有する。
土台部71が湾曲することで、フィラメント72を歯列の頬側に沿わせることができ、清掃性およびフィット性を向上させることができる。また、設置面積を最大化することが可能になり、電動の場合は振動効率の向上および清掃力の向上に寄与できる。
本実施形態では、フィラメント72Cからフィラメント72Aに亘って、傾斜角が順次大きくなるため、口が開き気味になった場合でもフィラメント72Cを頬側の歯先側にフィットさせ、フィラメント72Aを頬側の歯茎側にフィットさせることができる。
毛先部の配列ピッチP4が根元部の配列ピッチP3よりも小さい場合、P4/P3で表される値は、0.3以上、0.9以下であることが好ましい。P4/P3で表される値を0.3以上、0.9以下とすることで、例えば、フィラメント72における根元部の配列ピッチを大きくすることでフィラメントを疎にして操作性を確保しつつ、毛先部の配列ピッチを小さくすることで、頬側の歯列に沿う円弧形状を形成してフィット性を向上させることができる。
なお、毛先部と根元部で配列ピッチを異ならせること、およびP4/P3を上記範囲内に調整することは、土台部71の湾曲に従って一義的に決まるものではなく、例えば土台部71が直線状の領域でも実施してよい。
外側下ブラシ部32Fにおけるフィラメント72Aは、ブラシ面71aにおける下側の端部から内側に延びる。フィラメント72Bは、フィラメント72Aよりも上側の位置から内側に延びる。フィラメント72Cは、フィラメント72Bよりも上側の位置から内側に延びる。歯茎側に近く噛合面Kから最も遠いフィラメント72Aの噛合面Kに対する傾斜角は、フィラメント72Bおよびフィラメント72Cの噛合面Kに対する傾斜角よりも大きい。噛合面Kに最も近いフィラメント72Cの噛合面Kに対する傾斜角は、フィラメント72Aおよびフィラメント72Bの傾斜角よりも小さい。
外側ブラシ部32と内側ブラシ部31は、支持体50における周方向の中央を含む中央領域と、支持体50における周方向の端部に位置する端部領域と、をそれぞれを有する。中央領域と端部領域との間には中間領域が設けられる。
中央領域は、主として前歯と対向する領域である。
端部領域は、主として小臼歯から大臼歯と対向する領域である。
中間領域は、主として犬歯から小臼歯と対向する領域である。
図1に示すように、外側ブラシ部32において、中央領域を第1領域A1とし、中間領域を第2領域A2とし、端部領域を第3領域A3とする。
内側ブラシ部31において、中央領域を第1領域B1とし、中間領域を第2領域B2とし、端部領域を第3領域B3とする。
毛先間距離D1は、第1領域A1において外側ブラシ部32の毛丈が最短のフィラメント72と、第1領域B1において内側ブラシ部31の毛丈が最短のフィラメント42との距離である。
毛先間距離D2は、第2領域A2において外側ブラシ部32の毛丈が最短のフィラメント72と、第2領域B2において内側ブラシ部31の毛丈が最短のフィラメント42との距離である。
毛先間距離D3は、第3領域A3において外側ブラシ部32の毛丈が最短のフィラメント72と、第3領域B3において内側ブラシ部31の毛丈が最短のフィラメント42との距離である。
最短毛先間距離は、内側支持体51を基準に、周方向に対して垂直な同一平面上(すなわち、奥行方向に延びる平面)にある、内側と外側の毛先同士において、奥行方向に対して最も短い毛同士の毛先間距離として測定される値である。
当該毛先間距離は、噛合方向に(例えば、上側から)見たときに測定される値である。つまり、毛先間距離として測定される双方の毛は、噛合方向の位置が異なっていてもよい。なお、奥行方向に対して最も短い毛同士が周方向に対して垂直な同一平面上にない場合、当該平面は周方向に±0.5mmの厚さを有する仮想空間とし、毛同士がこの仮想空間に入れば同一平面上にあるとする。換言すると、奥行方向に対して最も短い毛同士は、周方向の離間距離が1.0mm以内であれば同一平面上にあるとする。
ブラシ部30を口腔内の部位に対応して、毛先間距離が異なる複数の領域に分割することで、各部位の清掃に適した仕様(毛腰向上、歯列形状に合わせた段差プロファイルの設定)にでき、口腔内の各部位を十分に清掃することができる。
つまり、主として小臼歯から大臼歯を含む奥歯と対向する領域における毛先間距離D3は、主として前歯と対向する領域における毛先間距離D1よりも大きい。
前歯は薄いため歯間までの距離は小さく、奥歯は厚いため歯間までの距離が大きい等、部位による歯のサイズに合った毛先間距離を設定することで、歯列へのフィット性と清掃力を向上できる。
毛先間距離D1、D2、D3は、D3>D2>D1の関係を満足することが好ましい。
つまり、外側ブラシ部32と内側ブラシ部31の奥行方向の隙間は、第1領域A1、B1よりも第2領域A2、B2が大きく、第2領域A2、B2よりも第3領域A3、B3が大きい。
上記の関係を満足することで、フィラメント42、72と接触機会が少ない奥歯でも十分な清掃力を確保することができる。
上記の関係を満足することで、フィラメント42、72と接触機会が少ない奥歯でも十分な清掃力を確保することができる。
上記の関係を満足することで、歯間が深い奥歯への進入性および清掃力を確保することができる。
上記の関係を満足することで、歯間が深い奥歯への進入性および清掃力を確保できるとともに、歯のサイズに応じて配置プロファイルの周期を変えて、よりフィット性を向上させることができる。
フィラメント42、72の総本数が10本未満の場合、掻き取り力不足して清掃機能が低下する。フィラメント42、72の総本数が150本を超えた場合、フィラメント42、72が密に集まり撓みにくいため、フィット性が低下して清掃機能が低下する。
フィラメント42、72の総本数を10~150本とすることで、清掃機能およびフィット性を向上させることができる。
外側ブラシ部32は、歯列と対向する面積が広いため、フィラメント72の総本数を上記の範囲とすることで、歯列を広い範囲でカバーすることができる。
また、左右片側の第2領域B2および第3領域B3におけるフィラメント42の総本数は、第1領域B1におけるフィラメント42の総本数よりも多いことが好ましい。
上記の関係を満足することで、フィラメント42、72と接触機会が少ない奥歯でも十分な清掃力を確保することができる。
フィラメント42、72の列数が2以下の場合、ブラシ部30の噛合方向の幅は、2mm以上、5mm以下であることが好ましい。
フィラメント42、72の列数が2以上の場合、ブラシ部30の噛合方向の幅は、2mm以上、20mm以下であることが好ましい。ブラシ部30の最大幅は、支持体50の幅に応じて規定される。
フィラメント42、72の列数が2以下の場合、噛合方向におけるブラシ部30の数が増えることで、口腔内部位に応じてより精密な配置が可能となる。
フィラメント42、72の列数が2以上の場合、ブラシ部30の幅が大きくなることで、幅方向の剛性が高まりブラシ部30が撓りにくくなる。
そのため、ブラシ部30の清掃力を高めることができる。また、マウスピース部20が電動の場合は、ブラシ部30の周方向の長さが増しても振動の減衰を抑制できる。
ブラシ部30を複数設ける場合、噛合方向では1個以上であることが好ましく、2個以上であることがより好ましい。ブラシ部30を複数設ける場合、噛合方向では4個以下であることが好ましく、3個以下であることがより好ましい。
ブラシ部30を噛合方向に複数設ける場合の上限値と下限値は、任意に組み合わせることができる。
これにより、周方向は大きく前側、右側および左側の3つのエリアに区画し、さらに細分化すると前側、右側、左側、前側と右側の中間、前側と左側の中間の5つのエリアに区画したと見なし、それぞれのエリアに対応した仕様設計を可能とする。幅方向については、大きく上下顎に区画すると見なし、上顎、下顎に対応した仕様設計を可能とする。
このように、ブラシ部30の個数に上限を定めることで、各々のブラシ部30および周辺の支持体50が過度に独立して秩序なく個別に動くことを抑制し、違和感を回避できる。また、マウスピース部20が電動の場合は、振動が減衰しづらく伝わりやすくなり、清掃機能を高めることができる。
ブラシ部30の周方向の長さが5mm以上であれば、最も小さい子供の前歯の1歯分まで精密なフィット性を獲得できる。
ブラシ部30の周方向の長さが150mm以下であれば、マウスピース部20を手動で動かした際に、歯列から逸脱する余剰領域が減り、口腔内の立体障害が少なくなり、操作性を確保できる。
また、マウスピース部20が電動の場合は、歯列全体に対し振動減衰を少なくしつつフィットさせることができる。
ブラシ部30が第1成形体であり、支持体50と別部材であることで、ブラシ部30の硬度やプロファイルの制約が緩和され、口腔内の部位ごとに口腔清掃に適した仕様(毛腰向上、歯列形状に合わせた段差プロファイルの設定など)にでき、口腔内の各部位を十分に清掃できる。
ポリウレタンは、スチレン系やポリステル系などの他のエラストマーに比べて、引張強度および機械的な耐摩耗性が高い傾向にあるため、軟質樹脂にポリウレタンを用いることで、薄肉にしても破断しづらくなり、機械的な強度および長期の使用を可能にできる。
シリコーンは、特に高度の耐熱性と耐薬品性を有し、煮沸消毒や歯磨き粉の存在下での品質劣化を少なくできる。
ブラシ部30の少なくとも1つは、ショアD硬度70以下の軟質樹脂で形成されることが好ましく、ショアD硬度66以下の軟質樹脂で形成されることがより好ましい。ブラシ部30の少なくとも1つを形成する軟質樹脂の硬度の上限値と下限値は、任意に組み合わせることができる。
「ショアA硬度」は、JIS K 7215あるいはJIS K 6253に従って測定されるプラスチックのデュロメータA硬さを意味する。「ショアD硬度」は、JIS K 6253に規定されるデュローメータタイプDの硬度を意味する。
軟質樹脂の硬度が上記の下限値未満の場合、掻き取り力の不足と、マウスピース部20が電動の場合は振動の伝達性不足も生じ清掃機能が低下する。
軟質樹脂の硬度が上記の上限値を超える場合、フィラメント42、72と土台部41、71が撓みにくくなりフィット性が低下して清掃機能が低下する。
また、口腔内での占有体積を最小限にするためには、一般的な一体成形歯ブラシよりも短い毛丈が好ましい。本実施形態では、ブラシ部30における硬度の上限を規定することで、比較的短い毛丈ながらも、フィラメント42、72が撓んで動くことを可能とする。
図8および図9に示すように、支持体50は、内側支持体51と外側支持体52と連結部53とを有する。
内側支持体51は、上端に位置し周方向に沿って延びる上壁部54と、下端に位置し周方向に沿って延びる下壁部55と、噛合方向で上壁部54と下壁部55の間に位置し周方向に沿って延びる中間壁部56と、噛合方向に延び中間壁部56を介して上壁部54と下壁部55とを連結する連結壁部57、58、59を有する。上壁部54、下壁部55および中間壁部56は、周方向の全体に亘って配置されている。連結壁部57と連結壁部58は、周方向に間隔をあけて配置されている。連結壁部59は周方向の両端にそれぞれ形成されている。
外側支持体52は、上端に位置し周方向に沿って延びる上壁部64と、下端に位置し周方向に沿って延びる下壁部65と、噛合方向で上壁部64と下壁部65の間に位置し周方向に沿って延びる中間壁部66と、噛合方向に延び中間壁部66を介して上壁部64と下壁部65とを連結する連結壁部67、68、69、70、52Aを有する。上壁部64、下壁部65および中間壁部66は、周方向の全体に亘って配置されている。連結壁部67と連結壁部68は、周方向に間隔をあけて配置されている。連結壁部69と連結壁部70は、連結壁部67と連結壁部68の周方向の外側にそれぞれ配置されている。連結壁部52Aは周方向の両端にそれぞれ形成されている。中間壁部66は、噛合方向の位置が中間壁部56と同一である。
内側支持体51および外側支持体52の奥行方向の厚さを1.5mm以上、6mm以下とすることで、土台部41、71が安定して内側支持体51および外側支持体52に固定される十分な厚さとなり、また、体積が過度に大きくならないため、よだれ防止や操作性向上にも寄与する。
なお、内側支持体51および外側支持体52の奥行方向の厚さは、嵌合凹部61A、61B、61C、61D、61E、61Fおよび嵌合凹部62A、62B、62C、62D、62E、62F、62G、62H、62J、62Kが設けられない位置での厚さである。
連結板53Aは、噛合方向と直交する板状であり、周方向の下端まで延びている。連結板53Aにおける内側の端部は、内側支持体51における中間壁部56と繋がっている。連結板53Aにおける外側の端部は、外側支持体52における中間壁部66と繋がっている。
フィラメント53Bは、例えば、奥歯と対向する位置に配置される。
フィラメント53Bが、奥歯と対向する位置に配置され上側と下側に突出しているため、ブラシ部30が届きにくい奥歯の噛合面を効果的に清掃することができる。
支持体50が第1成形体であるブラシ部30とは別部材として成形された第2成形体であることで、ブラシ部30に制約されず、支持体50の広がりやすさを締めすぎず緩すぎない適度なものにできる。そのため、支持体50の歯列へのフィット性が向上する。
支持体50がブラシ部30よりも硬いことで、支持体50の形状を安定化させることができ、歯列にしっかりとフィットし、清掃力を確保することができる。また、支持体50がブラシ部30よりも硬いことで、ブラシ部30を強固に固定できる。また、マウスピース部20が電動の場合は振動も伝わりやすくなる。
支持体50の硬度が上記の下限よりも低い場合、支持体50の形状を安定化させることができず、歯列へのフィット性や清掃力も低下する。また、振動も伝わりにくく、ブラシ部30の固定も困難である。さらに、マウスピース部20が電動の場合は振動も伝わり難くなる。
支持体50の硬度が上記の上限よりも高い場合、刷掃時の歯列への追従性が損なわれる。また、支持体50の口腔への出し入れがしにくくなる。
支持体50は、ブラシ部30よりもショアA硬度が5以上高いことが好ましい。
これにより、上記の効果を助長できる。
離間している領域が上記の範囲であれば、支持体50の形状を安定化させることができ、歯列にしっかりとフィットして清掃力を確保することができる。
これにより、マウスピース部20を動かしたときに内側と外側の位置関係が過度に逸脱したものにならず、歯列への追従性が向上する。さらに、奥歯の咬合面部が繋がっている場合は、奥歯の噛み合わせを刷掃できる。また、マウスピース部20が電動の場合は振動が伝わりやすくなり清掃力が向上する。
マウスピース部20が電動の場合は、内側支持体51、外側支持体52および連結部53を一体成形した後にシャフト14を固定する場合、支持体50を準備することは、内側支持体51、外側支持体52および連結部53を射出成形等によって一体成形することと、シャフト14を固定することと、を含む。
ブラシ部30を支持体50に結合して支持させることで、図1に示したように、ブラシ部30が周方向に沿ってU字状に配置されたマウスピース部20が製作される。
図10は、結合部の変形例を示す側面図である。
図10に示すように、ブラシ部30が、土台部41、71における支持体50と対向する面に軸状の結合部43A、73Aを有する構成であってもよい。
この構成を採る場合、支持体50に結合部43A、73Aが挿入されて嵌合する凹部を設ければよい。
また、機械的結合の他に、吸盤、吸引による減圧吸着方式や、ヒーター、超音波を用いた熱溶着等の熱的接着結合、マグネットの吸着力等を用いた外部力方式、支持体50の収縮作用、ファンデルワールス力、静電気を用いた化学的結合によってブラシ部30と支持体50を結合させる構成であってもよい。
次に、マウスピース部20の第2実施形態について、図12を参照して説明する。
この図において、図1~図11に示す第1実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
第1実施形態では、内側ブラシ部31および外側ブラシ部32がそれぞれ複数設けられる構成を例示した。本実施形態では、図12に示すように、周方向全体の長さを有する単一の内側ブラシ部31が内側支持体51に結合され、周方向全体の長さを有する単一の外側ブラシ部32が外側支持体52に結合されている。
内側ブラシ部31および外側ブラシ部32が平面状に成形された場合は、内側支持体51および外側支持体52の湾曲に沿って湾曲させながら嵌合凹部に嵌合させて結合させればよい。
他の構成は、上記第1実施形態と同様である。
次に、マウスピース部20の第3実施形態について、図13および図14を参照して説明する。
これらの図において、図1~図11に示す第1実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
本実施形態のマウスピース部20は、内側支持体51を弾性変形させて周方向に沿って湾曲させる弾性部材81と、外側支持体52を弾性変形させて周方向に沿って湾曲させる弾性部材82とを有する。
弾性部材81、82の表面が露出しないため、不快感や違和感を生じさせない。
図14に示すように、内側支持体51および外側支持体52は、平面状に成形される。内側ブラシ部31および外側ブラシ部32は、平面状の内側支持体51および外側支持体52にそれぞれ結合される。
内側支持体51および外側支持体52が平面状に成形されるため、成形用の金型構造をシンプルにでき、製造コストを低減できるとともに、結合作業の容易化を実現できる。
外側ブラシ部32が結合された外側支持体52は、弾性部材82が装着された際の弾性力によって弾性変形して周方向沿って湾曲する。湾曲する外側支持体52は、内側へのテンションが加わることで、頬側の歯列へのフィット性と清掃力が向上する。
弾性部材81、82は、厚さが下限以上で十分な強度を持ち、上限以下でコンパクトな体積となり操作性を担保しつつ、上記効果を得られる。
次に、マウスピース部20の第5実施形態について、図15および図16を参照して説明する。
これらの図において、図12に示す第2実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
本実施形態のマウスピース部20は、第3実施形態と同様に、内側支持体51を弾性変形させて周方向に沿って湾曲させる弾性部材81と、外側支持体52を弾性変形させて周方向に沿って湾曲させる弾性部材82とを有する。
図16に示すように、内側支持体51および外側支持体52は、平面状に成形される。内側ブラシ部31および外側ブラシ部32は、平面状の内側支持体51および外側支持体52にそれぞれ結合される。
他の構成は、上記第1実施形態と同様である。
また、マウスピース部20は、周方向の全体に亘って設けられる構成以外にも、例えば、左右のうち一方の領域のみに設けられ、連結部53についても当該領域のみ設けられる構成であってもよい。
突出部を設けることで、歯同士の噛合面を擦ることができ、清掃力が向上する。
突出部の厚さとしては、0.5~3.0mmであることが好ましい。
以下、第2実施形態の歯ブラシおよび歯ブラシ製造方法の実施の形態を、図17から図24を参照して説明する。
歯ブラシ101は、マウスピース型の歯ブラシであり、把持部110と連結体120とを有する。以下、連結体120をマウスピース部120と呼ぶ。
連結体120は、把持部110を介して振動を付与される。
把持部110からはシャフト114が突出し、マウスピース部120に連結されている。
なお、マウスピース部120から突出するシャフト114が把持部110に連結される構成であってもよい。
連結体120は、シャフト114を介して把持部110から振動を付与される。
電気駆動ユニットは、電源部111、振動素子112および制御部13を有する。制御部13は、電源部111の電力により振動素子112を駆動させる。電源部111は、例えば、充電式バッテリ、電池等で構成される。振動素子112は、例えば、圧電素子、電磁音響変換器、アンバランスモータ等で構成される。振動素子112が生じさせる振動は、奥行方向に延びる軸線を中心とする回転方向で、一定の所定回転角度で回転方向の反転を繰り返す振動である。
把持部110において電気駆動ユニットに連結されたシャフト114は、回転方向の反転を繰り返して振動する。振動素子112の駆動によりシャフト114が振動することで、マウスピース部120は、回転方向の反転を繰り返して振動する。
図18は、マウスピース部120におけるブラシ部130を上側から見た図である。
内側ブラシ部131において、内側上ブラシ部131Bと内側上ブラシ部131Cは、左右方向で線対称であるため、内側上ブラシ部131Cの説明を省略する場合がある。
上述したように、内側下ブラシ部131D、131E、131Fは、内側上ブラシ部131A、131B、131Cとそれぞれ噛合方向で線対称であるため、内側下ブラシ部131D、131E、131Fの説明を省略する場合がある。
内側ブラシ部131および外側ブラシ部132をそれぞれ噛合方向で複数配置する場合、1つ以上、4つ以下であることが好ましく、2つ以上、3つ以下であることがより好ましい。
内側ブラシ部131および外側ブラシ部132をそれぞれ複数配置することで、歯列の頬側と舌側両方の歯列に同時に用毛を当てられる仕様が可能になる。また、内側ブラシ部131および外側ブラシ部132の湾曲が緩やかになるため、用毛の植設が容易になり、清掃実感が向上する。さらに、内側ブラシ部131および外側ブラシ部132ごとに異なる特徴を付与できることから、清掃性が向上する。
図19に示すように、内側上ブラシ部131Aは、土台部141と毛束142と結合部143を有する。
土台部141は、断面が矩形状である。図20は、内側上ブラシ部131Aを上側から見た図である。図20に示すように、土台部141は、上側から見て、外側に凸となる向きに周方向に沿って湾曲する箇所を周方向の両側に有する。
本実施形態は、歯列に沿った配列となるブラシ部130を用い、手動または電動でブラシ部130を動かすことを目的とした歯ブラシ101であるため、土台部141が湾曲することで、フィラメント42を歯列の舌側に沿わせることができ、清掃性およびフィット性を向上させることができる。また、ブラシ部130の設置面積を最大化することが可能になり、電動の場合は振動効率の向上および清掃力の向上に寄与できる。
図20に示すように、土台部141の長さLは、ブラシ面141aにおける周方向の両端を結ぶ直線距離で定義される。土台部141の長さLは、5mm以上であることが好ましく、15mm以上であることがより好ましい。土台部141の長さLを5mm以上とすることで、フィット性を感じやすいとともに、電動の場合は振動が減衰しにくいことから末端まで伝わりやすくなり、清掃性を高めることができる。
土台部141の曲率半径としては、3mm以上、80mm以下であることが好ましい。
土台部141の曲率半径を上記の範囲とすることで、周方向に動かした際に無理なく歯列に沿って動くことができ、支持体150の動きと程よく連動することができる。
土台部141の奥行方向の厚さを6mm以下とすることで、支持体150の厚さが口腔内での圧迫感を抑えることができ、かつ奥歯など口腔内のスペースが狭い部分にも入りやすくなる。その結果、磨きやすい仕様になることから、清掃実感および清掃性が向上する。
一方で土台部141の厚さが過度に薄い場合、植毛強度の低下や、電動で使用した時の振動伝達が減弱を引き起こす。
土台部141の噛合方向の寸法である幅については後述する。
特に長さの大きい土台部141は、土台部141自体に切れ目やくびれ、厚さの変化があることにより、土台部141自体の柔軟性を確保し、程よい連動感を得られる。
平線方式の植毛では超高密のブラシ部130を製作できるため、毛腰を確保でき清掃性を向上させることができる。
また、植設の過程において土台部141の外周面に対して、360°の全周に亘って毛束142を設けたブラシ部を含めることで、幅広いバリエーションを実現でき、清掃性を向上させることができる。
根本部と毛先部で毛束142間の配列ピッチを異ならせることで、剛性と撓みやすさのバランス調整が可能となり、清掃力が向上する。例えば、毛束142における根元部の配列ピッチを小さくすることで毛腰を確保しつつ、毛先部の配列ピッチを大きくすることで、歯間への隙間進入性を確保して清掃機能を向上させることができる。
また、表裏の両面から全歯を覆うように毛束142を当てることができ、清掃実感が向上する。
内側上ブラシ部131Bは、主として、上顎側の犬歯および奥歯(小臼歯、大臼歯)における舌側の歯面と対向して配置される。
内側下ブラシ部131Dにおける毛束142は、ブラシ面141aから外側に延びる。ブラシ面141aは、下側に向かうにつれて内側に向かう方向に傾斜している。植毛穴141bは、噛合面Kに対して傾斜して延びている。植毛穴141bは、外側に向かうにつれて下側に向かう方向に傾斜している。
外側ブラシ部132は、外側上ブラシ部132A、132B、132C、132D、132Eを有する。外側上ブラシ部132A、132B、132C、132D、132Eは、上側に位置し、周方向に沿って上顎側の歯列における頬側の歯面と対向して配置される。外側上ブラシ部132A、132B、132C、132D、132Eは、外側上ブラシ部132Aを中央として、外側上ブラシ部132B、132Cが周方向の右側に間隔をあけて順次配置され、外側上ブラシ部132D、132Eが周方向の左側に間隔をあけて順次配置され、全体としてU字状に設けられている。
外側ブラシ部132において、外側上ブラシ部132Bと外側上ブラシ部132Dは、左右方向で線対称であり、外側上ブラシ部132Cと外側上ブラシ部132Eは、左右方向で線対称であるため、外側上ブラシ部132D、132Eの説明を省略する場合がある。
土台部171は、断面が矩形状である。図21は、外側上ブラシ部132Aを上側から見た図である。図21に示すように、土台部171は、上側から見て、外側に凸となる向きに周方向に沿って湾曲する箇所を周方向の両側に有する。
土台部171が湾曲することで、毛束172を歯列の舌側に沿わせることができ、清掃性およびフィット性を向上させることができる。また、設置面積を最大化することが可能になり、振動効率の向上および清掃力の向上に寄与できる。
土台部171の曲率半径としては、10mm以上、80mm以下であることが好ましい。
土台部171の曲率半径を上記の範囲とすることで、周方向に動かした際に無理なく歯列に沿って動くことができ、支持体150の動きと程よく連動することができる。
根本部と毛先部で毛束172間の配列ピッチを異ならせることで、剛性と撓みやすさのバランス調整が可能となり、清掃力が向上する。例えば、毛束172における根元部の配列ピッチを小さくすることで毛腰を確保しつつ、毛先部の配列ピッチを大きくすることで、歯間への隙間進入性を確保して清掃機能を向上させることができる。
また、表裏の両面から全歯を覆うように毛束172を当てることができ、清掃実感が向上する。
また、周方向で離れたブラシ部130の毛束172同士の干渉を抑えつつ(特に、外側ブラシ部132の湾曲部)、毛束172の植毛角度を調整して毛先部と根元部で配列ピッチを調整することで、清掃実感および清掃性が向上する。
外側下ブラシ部132Fにおける毛束172は、ブラシ面171aから内側に延びる。ブラシ面171aは、下側に向かうにつれて外側に向かう方向に傾斜している。植毛穴171bは、噛合面Kに対して傾斜して延びている。植毛穴171bは、内側に向かうにつれて下側に向かう方向に傾斜している。
外側ブラシ部132と内側ブラシ部131は、支持体150における周方向の中央を含む中央領域と、支持体150における周方向の端部に位置する端部領域と、をそれぞれを有する。中央領域と端部領域との間には中間領域が設けられる。
中央領域は、主として前歯と対向する領域である。
端部領域は、主として小臼歯から大臼歯と対向する領域である。
中間領域は、主として犬歯から小臼歯と対向する領域である。
図17に示すように、外側ブラシ部132において、中央領域を第1領域A1とし、中間領域を第2領域A2とし、端部領域を第3領域A3とする。
内側ブラシ部131において、中央領域を第1領域B1とし、中間領域を第2領域B2とし、端部領域を第3領域B3とする。
毛先間距離D1は、第1領域A1において外側ブラシ部132の毛丈が最短の毛束172と、第1領域B1において内側ブラシ部131の毛丈が最短の毛束142との距離である。
毛先間距離D2は、第2領域A2において外側ブラシ部132の毛丈が最短の毛束172と、第2領域B2において内側ブラシ部131の毛丈が最短の毛束142との距離である。
毛先間距離D3は、第3領域A3において外側ブラシ部132の毛丈が最短の毛束と、第3領域B3において内側ブラシ部131の毛丈が最短の毛束142との距離である。
最短毛先間距離は、内側支持体151を基準に、周方向に対して垂直な同一平面上(すなわち、奥行方向に延びる平面)にある、内側と外側の毛先同士において、奥行方向に対して最も短い毛同士の毛先間距離として測定される値である。
当該毛先間距離は、噛合方向に(例えば、上側から)見たときに測定される値である。つまり、毛先間距離として測定される双方の毛は、噛合方向の位置が異なっていてもよい。なお、奥行方向に対して最も短い毛同士が周方向に対して垂直な同一平面上にない場合、当該平面は周方向に±0.5mmの厚さを有する仮想空間とし、毛同士がこの仮想空間に入れば同一平面上にあるとする。換言すると、奥行方向に対して最も短い毛同士は、周方向の離間距離が1.0mm以内であれば同一平面上にあるとする。
ブラシ部130を口腔内の部位に対応した数で配置することで、各部位の清掃に適した仕様(毛腰向上、歯列形状に合わせた段差プロファイルの設定)にでき、口腔内の各部位を十分に清掃することができる。
毛先間距離D1、D3は、D3>D1の関係を満足する。
つまり、主として小臼歯から大臼歯を含む奥歯と対向する領域における毛先間距離D3は、主として前歯と対向する領域における毛先間距離D1よりも大きい。
前歯は薄いため歯間までの距離は小さく、奥歯は厚いため歯間までの距離が大きい等、部位による歯のサイズに合った毛先間距離を設定することで、歯列へのフィット性と清掃力を向上できる。
毛先間距離D1、D2、D3は、D3>D2>D1の関係を満足することが好ましい。
つまり、外側ブラシ部132と内側ブラシ部131の奥行方向の隙間は、第1領域A1、B1よりも第2領域A2、B2が大きく、第2領域A2、B2よりも第3領域A3、B3が大きい。
毛先間距離D2は、2.0~9.0mmであることが好ましい。
毛先間距離D3は、4.0~12.0mmであることが好ましい。
第1領域B1に位置する内側ブラシ部131における土台部141の噛合方向の長さをWB1とする。第2領域B2に位置する内側ブラシ部131における土台部141の噛合方向の長さをWB2とする。第3領域B3に位置する内側ブラシ部131における土台部141の噛合方向の長さをWB3とする。
WA1>WA2>WA3およびWB1>WB2>WB3の関係をそれぞれ満足することが好ましい。
また、奥歯は、前歯に比べて奥行方向に厚く、奥歯周辺での口腔内の空間が限られるため、土台部171の噛合方向の長さWA3および土台部141の噛合方向の長さWB3を小さくすることで、口腔内の圧迫感や反射嘔吐のリスクを低減することができる。そのため、清掃実感および清掃性が向上する。
長さWA1としては、5~10mmであることが好ましい。
長さWA2としては、4~9mmであることが好ましい。
長さWA3としては、2~9mmであることが好ましい。
長さWB1としては、4~9mmであることが好ましい。
長さWB2としては、3~8mmであることが好ましい。
長さWB3としては、2~8mmであることが好ましい。
噛合方向の長さを25mm以下とすることで、外側ブラシ部132と内側ブラシ部131が大きくなりすぎず、口腔内での違和感を軽減することができる。
土台部141と土台部171における噛合方向の長さは、上顎および下顎の土台部141、171の合計値が50mm以下が好ましく、上顎と下顎それぞれ分けた場合は、上顎分(下顎分)で25mm以下とすることが好ましい。
一方、ブラシ面141a、171aが奥行方向と直交し、植毛穴141b、171bがブラシ面141a、171aの法線方向に対して傾斜することで、植毛穴141b、171bの傾斜角に応じて毛束142、172の毛先部が噛合面Kから離れた位置となる。この場合、ブラシ面141a、171aにおける植毛穴141b、171bの最大寸法は、植毛穴141b、171bの直径よりも大きくなる。例えば、植毛穴141b、171bの直径をdとし、ブラシ面141a、171aの法線方向に対する植毛穴141b、171bの傾斜角をθ1とすると、ブラシ面141a、171aにおける植毛穴141b、171bの最大寸法Sは、d/cos(θ1)で表される値となり、直径dよりも大きくなる。植毛穴141b、171bが形成された土台部141、171においては、強度確保のために最小肉厚が規定されるため、植毛穴141b、171bをブラシ面141a、171aの法線方向に対して傾斜させると、最大寸法Sが大きくなることで土台部141、171の噛合方向の寸法が長くなる。
領域毎に、各領域の磨きに適した用毛種を使用することで、清掃性を向上させることができる。
さらに、ブラシ部130が着脱可能であることで、ユーザの好みに合わせた用毛種を有するブラシ部130に交換することも可能になり、清掃実感および清掃性を向上させることができる。
第2領域A2、B2における用毛径としては、3~5milであることが好ましい。
第3領域A3、B3における用毛径としては、4~8milであることが好ましい。
領域毎に、各領域の磨きに適した用毛径を使用することで、清掃性を向上させることができる。また、ユーザの好みの硬さのブラシ部130を設計可能なことから清掃性を向上させることができる。
歯面の面積が比較的大きい第1領域A1および第1領域B1においては、多くの用毛を植設することにより、歯面全体に用毛が接触する構造となり、清掃実感および清掃性が向上する。
また、第3領域A3および第3領域B3については、植毛本数を比較的少なくすることにより、奥歯側の狭まった口腔内で用毛が歯茎や口腔粘膜に接触することによる圧迫感の低減、また反射嘔吐の抑制が実現でき、清掃実感を向上させることができる。
第2領域A2における用毛の本数は、150~500本であることが好ましい。
第3領域A3における用毛の本数は、70~250本であることが好ましい。
第1領域B1における用毛の本数は、100~500本であることが好ましい。
第2領域B2における用毛の本数は、100~500本であることが好ましい。
第3領域B3における用毛の本数は、50~250本であることが好ましい。
各領域における用毛本数が上記好ましい範囲よりも少ない場合には、ブラシ部130が疎に感じられ清掃実感が低下する。また、用毛本数が上記好ましい範囲よりも多い場合には、ブラシ部130が過密となり、マウスピース部120を動かした際に毛束142、172の程よい撓みが得られず、またマウスピース部120の円滑な動きが妨げられてしまう。
用毛本数を上記好ましい範囲とすることで、毛束142、172が程よく撓み清掃実感を向上させることができる。
なお、上記用毛の本数は一例を挙げただけであり、当該上限値を超えてもよい。例えば、非平線式の大穴を活用する際は、4000本~20万本の範囲であることが好ましい。
第3領域B3に植設される最長毛丈の用毛は、一部または全面に対して、第1領域B1および第2領域B2に植設される最長毛丈の用毛よりも長いことが好ましい。
上記の関係を満足することで、歯間が深い奥歯への進入性および清掃力を確保できるとともに、歯のサイズに応じて配置プロファイルの周期を変えて、よりフィット性を向上させることができる。
第3領域A3には、最長毛丈が3~8mmの用毛が単一の毛丈または複数の毛丈で植設される。
第3領域A3に植設される最長毛丈の用毛と、第1領域A1および第2領域A2に植設される最短毛丈の用毛との毛丈差は、1~6mmであることが好ましい。
また、少なくとも第3領域A3および第3領域B3には、領域内で毛丈に段差が設けられている。毛丈の段差としては、1~5mmであることが好ましい。
図22および図23に示すように、支持体150は、内側支持体151と外側支持体152と連結部153とを有する。
内側支持体151は、上端に位置し周方向に沿って延びる上壁部154と、下端に位置し周方向に沿って延びる下壁部155と、噛合方向で上壁部154と下壁部155の間に位置し周方向に沿って延びる中間壁部156と、噛合方向に延び中間壁部156を介して上壁部154と下壁部155とを連結する連結壁部157、158、159を有する。上壁部154、下壁部155および中間壁部156は、周方向の全体に亘って配置されている。連結壁部157と連結壁部158は、周方向に間隔をあけて配置されている。連結壁部159は周方向の両端にそれぞれ形成されている。
外側支持体152は、上端に位置し周方向に沿って延びる上壁部164と、下端に位置し周方向に沿って延びる下壁部165と、噛合方向で上壁部164と下壁部165の間に位置し周方向に沿って延びる中間壁部166と、噛合方向に延び中間壁部166を介して上壁部164と下壁部165とを連結する連結壁部167、168、169、170、152Aを有する。上壁部164、下壁部165および中間壁部166は、周方向の全体に亘って配置されている。連結壁部167と連結壁部168は、周方向に間隔をあけて配置されている。連結壁部169と連結壁部170は、連結壁部167と連結壁部168の周方向の外側にそれぞれ配置されている。連結壁部152Aは周方向の両端にそれぞれ形成されている。中間壁部166は、噛合方向の位置が中間壁部156と同一である。
連結板153Aは、噛合方向と直交する板状であり、周方向の下端まで延びている。連結板153Aにおける内側の端部は、内側支持体151における中間壁部156と繋がっている。連結板153Aにおける外側の端部は、外側支持体152における中間壁部166と繋がっている。
毛束153Bが、奥歯と対向する位置に配置され上側と下側に突出しているため、ブラシ部130が届きにくい奥歯の噛合面を効果的に清掃することができる。
支持体150がブラシ部130とは別部材として成形された成形体であることで、ブラシ部130に制約されず、支持体150の広がりやすさを締めすぎず緩すぎない適度なものにできる。そのため、支持体150の歯列へのフィット性が向上する。
従って、土台部141、171は、異なる材料で形成された支持体150に少なくとも一部が被覆されている。
土台部141、171が、土台部141、171よりも軟らかい支持体150に少なくとも一部が被覆されることで、口腔粘膜へのマウスピース部120の接触による歯茎や口腔粘膜を傷つけるリスクを低減でき清掃実感を向上させることができる。
また、毛束142、172が植設されたブラシ部130を支持体150に結合させるため、支持体150に直接毛束を植設することが不要となり、製造性の向上および清掃性の向上を図ることができる。
硬度差が上記の下限を下回った場合、固い物同士だと嵌め込み時に破壊してしまう可能性があり、柔らかい物同士だと嵌合が外れやすい等、適切な嵌合に支障を来す虞がある。また、土台部141、171は植毛強度を確保するために比較的硬くする必要があり、支持体150はマウスピース部120を動かした時の歯列へのフィット性を上げるために比較的柔軟にする必要がある。硬度差が上記の下限を下回ると、上記何れか一方の役割が果たせなくなってしまう。
材料の硬度差が上記の範囲であれば、構成する材料が異なる土台部141、171と支持体150が適度な連動感を持って動くことができる。
本実施形態では、材料の硬度差を上記の範囲とすることで、異なる部材でありながら、適度な連動感を持って動くことが可能となり、清掃実感を向上させることができる。
土台部141、171を構成する材料の硬度が曲げ弾性率800MPa未満の場合、植毛時に割れが生じやすくなり毛束142、172を植設することが困難になる。また、支持体150と連動して動いた際に十分な植毛強度を担保できず、電動で使用する際の振動伝達も低下する可能性がある。
土台部141、171を構成する材料の硬度が曲げ弾性率3000MPaを超えた場合、口腔内を傷つける可能性がある。また、マウスピース部120を動かす際や支持体150への嵌め込み時に支持体150を破損してしまう可能性がある。
土台部141、171を構成する材料の硬度を曲げ弾性率800MPa以上、曲げ弾性率3000MPa以下とすることで、口腔内を傷つける可能性を抑制しつつ、支持体150と連動して動ける十分な植毛強度を担保することができる。
支持体150を構成する材料の硬度が50MPa未満の場合、土台部141、171を十分に支持できない可能性がある。支持体150を構成する材料の硬度が1000MPaを超えた場合、頬粘膜、舌に接触した際の当たり心地が低下する可能性がある。また、口腔内での圧迫感が強く、反射嘔吐の原因になる可能性がある。さらに、マウスピース部120を動かした際に形状が追従せずに歯列へのフィット性が確保できない可能性がある。
支持体150を構成する材料の硬度を50MPa以上、100MPa以下とすることで、土台部141、171を十分に支持できるとともに、頬粘膜、舌に接触した際に当たり心地のよい柔らかさを確保できる。
離間している領域が上記の範囲であれば、支持体150の形状を安定化させることができ、歯列にしっかりとフィットして清掃力を確保することができる。
また、内側支持体151と外側支持体152の結合部が一部であることから用毛の植毛可能面積を増やすことができ、清掃力を向上させることができる。
これにより、マウスピース部120が電動の場合は振動が伝わりやすくなり清掃力が向上する。また、奥歯の咬合面部が繋がっている場合は、奥歯の噛み合わせを刷掃できる。
マウスピース部120が電動の場合は内側支持体151、外側支持体152および連結部153を一体成形した後にシャフト114を固定する場合、支持体150を準備することは、内側支持体151、外側支持体152および連結部153を射出成形等によって一体成形することと、シャフト114を固定することと、を含む。
ブラシ部130を支持体150に結合して支持させることで、図17に示したように、ブラシ部130が周方向に沿ってU字状に配置されたマウスピース部120が製作される。
また、マウスピース部120は、周方向の全体に亘って設けられる構成以外にも、例えば、左右のうち一方の領域のみに設けられ、連結部153についても当該領域のみ設けられる構成であってもよい。
例えば、図24に示されるように、連結部153が周方向の中央で内側支持体151と外側支持体152を連結する構成であってもよい。なお、図24においては、ブラシ部130および支持体150を簡略的に示し、毛束の図示も省略している。
突出部を設けることで、歯同士の噛合面を擦ることができ、清掃力が向上する。
突出部の厚さとしては、0.5~3.0mmであることが好ましい。
以下、第3実施形態の歯ブラシおよび歯ブラシ製造方法の実施の形態を、図25から図44を参照して説明する。
図25に示すように、歯ブラシ201は、マウスピース型の歯ブラシであり、把持部210と連結体220とを有する。以下、連結体220をマウスピース部220と呼ぶ。
マウスピース部220は、把持部210を介して振動を付与される。
把持部210からはシャフト214が突出し、マウスピース部220に連結されている。
なお、マウスピース部220から突出するシャフト214が把持部210に連結される構成であってもよい。
マウスピース部220は、シャフト214を介して把持部210から振動を付与される。
本実施形態では、把持部210に電気駆動ユニットが設けられ、電気駆動ユニットの駆動で生じた振動がマウスピース部220に付与される形態について説明する。
把持部210において電気駆動ユニットに連結されたシャフト214は、回転方向の反転を繰り返して振動する。振動素子212の駆動によりシャフト214が振動することで、マウスピース部220は、回転方向の反転を繰り返して振動する。
マウスピース部220は、第1ブラシ体230と、第2ブラシ体260と、連結部280と、を有する。第1ブラシ体230は、把持部210よりも奥行方向の内側に位置する。第2ブラシ体260は、奥行方向について把持部210と第1ブラシ体230との間に位置し、第1ブラシ体230に対して離れて配置されている。第2ブラシ体260は、第1ブラシ体230に対して間隙Sをあけて配置されている。
図27は、図26におけるB-B断面図である。
図26および図27に示すように、第1支持体231の噛合方向の寸法は、奥行方向の外側が最も大きく、内側に向かうにつれて徐々に小さくなっている。第1支持体231の上側の端部は、奥行方向の外側が最も上側に位置し、内側に向かうにつれて徐々に下側に向かう方向に傾斜している。第1支持体231の下側の端部は、奥行方向の外側が最も下側に位置し、内側に向かうにつれて徐々に上側に向かう方向に傾斜している。
図28に示すように、第1ブラシ部241は、第1支持体231に上下に間隔をあけて設けられている。第1ブラシ部241は、第1支持体231における上端側および下端側にそれぞれ設けられている。第1ブラシ部241は、第1支持体231における奥行方向の外側のブラシ面231aから奥行方向の外側に延びる。ブラシ面231aは、上側から見て、外側に凸となる向きに周方向に沿って湾曲している箇所を有する。
第2ブラシ部271A、271B、271C、271Dおよび第2ブラシ部271E、271F、271G、271Hを含む第2ブラシ部271は、図25および図26に示すように、それぞれ周方向の全体に亘って間隔をあけて複数設けられている。
図29に示すように、第1支持体231および第2支持体261は、連結部280による連結領域を除き奥行方向に間隙Sを介してブラシ面231aとブラシ面261aが対向している。すなわち、第1ブラシ部241と第2ブラシ部271は、奥行方向に間隙Sを介して対向している。第1ブラシ体230における第1支持体231と、第2ブラシ体260における第2支持体261は、マウスピース部220を口腔内に装着して歯列にフィットした使用時に、変形特性も含め奥行方向とθ方向の双方に独立して相対移動可能である。
「ショアA硬度」は、JIS K 7215あるいはJIS K 6253に従って測定されるプラスチックのデュロメータA硬さを意味する。「ショアD硬度」は、JIS K 6253に規定されるデュローメータタイプDの硬度を意味する。
従って、硬度を上記の範囲とし、且つ、第1支持体231の硬度を第2支持体261の硬度よりも大きくすることで、第1ブラシ体230における第1支持体231と第2ブラシ体260における第2支持体261の動きの独立性が高まり、第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271が歯列形状やブラッシング動作に追従することが可能となり、歯列の頬側と舌側のそれぞれにフィットすることで清掃力が向上する。
さらに、第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271についても、硬度が上記範囲であるとより好ましく、軟質樹脂の硬度が上記の下限値未満の場合、掻き取り力の不足と、マウスピース部220が電動の場合は振動の伝達性不足も生じ清掃機能が低下する。
軟質樹脂の硬度が上記の上限値を超える場合、第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271が撓みにくくなりフィット性が低下して清掃機能が低下する。
ポリウレタンは、スチレン系やポリステル系などの他のエラストマーに比べて、引張強度および機械的な耐摩耗性が高い傾向にあるため、軟質樹脂にポリウレタンを用いることで、薄肉にしても破断しづらくなり、機械的な強度および長期の使用を可能にできる。
シリコーンは、特に高度の耐熱性と耐薬品性を有し、煮沸消毒や歯磨き粉の存在下での品質劣化を少なくできる。
第1支持体231における奥行方向の寸法L1としては、1.5mm以上、7mm以下であることが好ましい。第2支持体261における奥行方向の寸法L2としては、1.5mm以上、6mm以下であることが好ましい。第1支持体231における奥行方向の寸法L1のうち、θ方向の端部は、第2支持体261における奥行方向の寸法L2よりも大きい。
つまり、θ方向の端部において、第2支持体261における奥行方向の寸法L2は、第1支持体231における奥行方向の寸法L1よりも小さい(薄い)。
マウスピース部220を左右に動かした際には、奥歯側では第1ブラシ体230および第2ブラシ体260の双方が歯列から外れるリスクが高い。これに対して、第1支持体231および第2支持体261における奥行方向の寸法を前歯側から奥歯側に向かって徐々に小さくすることによって、特に第1支持体231および第2支持体261における奥歯側の柔軟性が高まり、歯列への第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271の追従性を高めることができる。
図30は、図26におけるD-D断面図である。
図30に示すように、連結部280は、第1支持体231と第2支持体261を前記奥行方向で連結する。連結部280は、周方向の端部において第1支持体231と第2支持体261を連結する。連結部280は、噛合方向における中央の位置で第1支持体231と第2支持体261を連結する。連結部280は、第3ブラシ部281を有する。
長さL11のうち長さL12の割合を、20%以上、70%以下とすることによって、振動およびブラッシング動作の低下を抑制して清掃力を向上できる。
振動源から第1支持体231と第2支持体261の連結位置までが、θ方向における中央から端部までの領域の30%未満の場合には、θ方向の端部に振動が十分に伝達されない可能性がある。
振動源から第1支持体231と第2支持体261の連結位置までをθ方向における中央から端部までの領域の30%以上とすることにより、θ方向の端部に振動を十分に伝達することが可能になる。
これにより、第1支持体231と第2支持体261との間で伝達される振動が減衰しにくくなる。
そのため、本実施形態の歯ブラシ201においては、第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271がそれぞれ高いフィット性で歯列にフィットすることで、清掃力が向上し高い清掃実感が得ることができる。
続いて、マウスピース部220の第7実施形態について、図31を参照して説明する。
この図において、図25から図30に示す第6実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
図31に示すように、上側から見て第1支持体231におけるθ方向の両端には、変曲点230aを起点として奥行方向の外側に向けて反るように湾曲する湾曲部232がそれぞれ設けられている。
湾曲部232と湾曲部262は、θ方向の外側に向かうにつれて奥行方向で互いに接近する方向に湾極している。
他の構成は、上記第6実施形態と同様である。
続いて、マウスピース部220の第8実施形態について、図32を参照して説明する。
この図において、図25から図30に示す第6実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
上側から見て、第2支持体261における間隙Sに臨むブラシ面261aには、V字状の切欠部263が複数(図32では、一例として4つ)形成されている。切欠部263は、θ方向に間隔をあけて配置されている。切欠部263は、θ方向に線対称に配置されている。
他の構成は、上記第6実施形態と同様である。
一方、第2支持体261においては、ブラシ面261aに切欠部263が複数形成されているため、第2支持体261は、奥行方向の外側よりも内側に曲がりやすくなる。
従って、本実施形態のマウスピース部220においては、上記第6実施形態と同様の作用・効果が得られることに加えて、第1支持体231と第2支持体261の奥行方向の距離が広い状態から狭い状態になる形で、歯列に対して第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271の追従性を向上させることができる。
続いて、マウスピース部220の第9実施形態について、図33を参照して説明する。
この図において、図25から図30に示す第6実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
上側から見て、第2支持体261における間隙Sに臨むブラシ面261aと逆側の面261bには、V字状の切欠部264が複数(図33では、一例として4つ)形成されている。切欠部264は、θ方向に間隔をあけて配置されている。切欠部264は、θ方向に線対称に配置されている。
他の構成は、上記第6実施形態と同様である。
従って、本実施形態のマウスピース部220においては、上記第6実施形態と同様の作用・効果が得られることに加えて、第1支持体231と第2支持体261の奥行方向の距離が狭い状態から広い状態になる形で、歯列に対して第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271の追従性を向上させることができる。
例えば、奥歯側についてはブラシ面231aに切欠部233が形成され、歯の3番辺りのθ方向の角にあたる部分はブラシ面231aと逆側の面231bに切欠部234が形成される構成のように、ブラシ面231aに形成された切欠部233と、ブラシ面231aと逆側の面231bに形成された切欠部234とが適宜混在する構成であってもよい。
続いて、マウスピース部220の第10実施形態について、図34を参照して説明する。
この図において、図32に示す第8実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
上側から見て、第2支持体261における間隙Sに臨むブラシ面261aには、半円状の切欠部265が複数(図34では、一例として6つ)形成されている。切欠部265は、θ方向に間隔をあけて配置されている。切欠部265は、θ方向に線対称に配置されている。
他の構成は、上記第8実施形態と同様である。
なお、清掃性を向上させるために、切欠部235、265に硬度が異なる素材を充填することも可能である。
続いて、マウスピース部220の第11実施形態について、図35を参照して説明する。
この図において、図25から図30に示す第6実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
これにより、第1支持体231は、基本となるU字形状を維持するとともに、歯列形状に沿うようアシストされるため、第1ブラシ部241によるフィット性と清掃力が向上し、さらに、口腔内に入れやすくなる。
無負荷の第1硬質プレート236の曲率半径としては、15mm以上、40mm以下であることが好ましい。
これにより、第2支持体261は、基本となるU字形状を維持するとともに、歯列形状に沿うようアシストされるため、第2ブラシ部271によるフィット性と清掃力が向上し、さらに、口腔内に入れやすくなる。
無負荷の第2硬質プレート266の曲率半径としては、20mm以上、60mm以下であることが好ましい。
第1硬質プレート236および第2硬質プレート266の硬度をショアA硬度50以上とすることで、振動を効率的に伝達できる。第1硬質プレート236および第2硬質プレート266の硬度をショアD硬度75以下とすることで、第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271の歯列への追従性を高めることができる。
第1硬質プレート236および第2硬質プレート266が、θ方向における中央から15%以上の領域で存在することによって、第1支持体231に奥行方向の内側への負荷が加わったときに、第1支持体231に奥行方向の外側へのテンションを付与でき、第2支持体261に奥行方向の外側への負荷が加わったときに、第2支持体261に奥行方向の内側へのテンションを付与できる。
第1硬質プレート236および第2硬質プレート266が、θ方向における中央から95%以下の領域で存在することによって、歯列への圧迫感や振動の違和感を与えずに使用することができる。
これにより、第1硬質プレート236および第2硬質プレート266の奥行方向の寸法を前歯側から奥歯側に向かって徐々に小さくすることと同様の効果が得られる。
これにより、θ方向の端部に位置する奥歯を第1硬質プレート236のプレート湾曲部が内側から歯の遠心面を巻き込み、第2硬質プレート266のプレート湾曲部が外側から歯の遠心面を巻き込むように異なる動きをする形状となり、奥歯に対する第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271の追従性と清掃力をさらに向上させることができる。
これにより、プレート切欠部に位置する第1支持体231および第2支持体261が歯の1つの曲面に沿うことが可能となり、歯列に対して第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271の追従性をさらに向上させることができる。
続いて、マウスピース部220の第12実施形態について、図36を参照して説明する。
この図において、図25から図30に示す第6実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
他の構成は、上記第6実施形態と同様である。
これにより、本実施形態のマウスピース部220においては、歯列への第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271のフィット性と清掃力を向上できる。
続いて、マウスピース部220の第13実施形態について、図37から図39を参照して説明する。
これらの図において、図25から図30に示す第6実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
他の構成は、上記第6実施形態と同様である。
また、連結部280が噛合方向に圧縮されたときに、空隙282よりも下側の連結部280が上側に変形するのに伴って、二点鎖線の矢印で示されるように、第1支持体231における連結部280よりも下側が奥行方向の外側に傾くとともに、第2支持体261における連結部280よりも下側が奥行方向の内側に傾く。
これにより、連歯列へのフィット性と清掃力を向上できる。
続いて、マウスピース部220の第14実施形態について、図40から図43を参照して説明する。
これらの図において、図25から図30に示す第6実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
他の構成は、上記第6実施形態と同様である。
このとき、第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271の下側が互いに離間することによって、第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271の上側が互いに近づく。
これにより、特に連結部280よりも上側に位置する第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271が歯列へのフィット性と清掃力を向上できる。
空隙282が設けられることによって、3つのブロックBは上側の3つのブロックBと下側の3つのブロックBの6つに分離される。
これにより、上側に位置する3つのブロックBは下側に凸となる曲線状に湾曲し、下側に位置する3つのブロックBは上側に凸となる曲線状に湾曲する。曲線状に湾曲する3つのブロックBは、上側および下側において、それぞれ奥行方向の最大寸法が短くなる。また、上側に位置する3つのブロックBと、下側に位置する3つのブロックBは上下に線対称となる。
そのため、第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271は、傾かずに互いに奥行方向に近づく。これにより第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271が歯列へのフィット性と清掃力を向上できる。
続いて、マウスピース部220の第15実施形態について、図44を参照して説明する。
この図において、図35に示す第11実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
これにより、本実施形態のマウスピース部220においては、上記第11実施形態と同様の作用・効果が得られることに加えて、第1硬質プレート236および第2硬質プレート266が、凹部237および凹部267が設けられた位置の曲げ強度が変化するため、第1ブラシ部241および第2ブラシ部271のフィット性、噛合面を含む清掃力、および振動伝達を歯列の位置によって、調整することができる。
また、凹部237および凹部267は、第1硬質プレート236および第2硬質プレート266を貫通する構成の他に、非貫通で薄肉化する構成や、第1硬質プレート236および第2硬質プレート266と硬度が異なる材質で形成される構成であってもよい。
なお、硬度が異なる素材で形成される構成の場合は、必ずしも凹んでいなくともよい。
また、マウスピース部220は、周方向の全体に亘って設けられる構成以外にも、例えば、左右のうち一方の領域のみに設けられる構成であってもよい。
以下、第4実施形態の歯ブラシの実施の形態を、図45から図55を参照して説明する。
図45に示すように、歯ブラシ301は、マウスピース型の歯ブラシであり、把持部310と連結体320とを有する。以下、連結体320をマウスピース部320と呼ぶ。
マウスピース部320は、把持部310を介して振動を付与される。
把持部310からはシャフト314が突出し、マウスピース部320に連結されている。
なお、マウスピース部320から突出するシャフト314が把持部310に連結される構成であってもよい。
マウスピース部320は、シャフト314を介して把持部310から振動を付与される。
本実施形態では、把持部310に電気駆動ユニットが設けられ、電気駆動ユニットの駆動で生じた振動がマウスピース部320に付与される形態について説明する。
把持部310において電気駆動ユニットに連結されたシャフト314は、回転方向の反転を繰り返して振動する。振動素子312の駆動によりシャフト314が振動することで、マウスピース部320は、回転方向の反転を繰り返して振動する。
マウスピース部320は、第1ブラシ体330と、第2ブラシ体360と、調整部350と、連結部380と、を有する。第1ブラシ体330は、把持部310よりも奥行方向の内側に位置する。第2ブラシ体360は、奥行方向について把持部310と第1ブラシ体330との間に位置し、第1ブラシ体330に対して離れて配置されている。第2ブラシ体360は、第1ブラシ体330に対して間隙Sをあけて配置されている。間隙Sは、マウスピース部320を噛合方向に貫く空間である。
図47は、図46におけるB-B断面図である。
図46および図47に示すように、第1支持体331の噛合方向の寸法は、奥行方向の外側が最も大きく、内側に向かうにつれて徐々に小さくなっている。第1支持体331の上側の端部は、奥行方向の外側が最も上側に位置し、内側に向かうにつれて徐々に下側に向かう方向に傾斜している。第1支持体331の下側の端部は、奥行方向の外側が最も下側に位置し、内側に向かうにつれて徐々に上側に向かう方向に傾斜している。
図48に示すように、第1ブラシ部341は、第1支持体331に上下に間隔をあけて設けられている。第1ブラシ部341は、第1支持体331における上端側および下端側にそれぞれ設けられている。第1ブラシ部341は、第1支持体331における奥行方向の外側のブラシ面331aから奥行方向の外側に延びる。ブラシ面331aは、上側から見て、外側に凸となる向きに周方向に沿って湾曲している箇所を有する。
第2ブラシ部371A、371B、371C、371Dおよび第2ブラシ部371E、371F、371G、371Hを含む第2ブラシ部371は、図45および図46に示すように、それぞれ周方向の全体に亘って間隔をあけて複数設けられている。
調整部350は、無負荷状態における第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離を調整可能である。第1支持体331および第2支持体361が無負荷状態であるとは、重力および使用者による距離調整操作時の負荷以外に、口腔内における歯列や頬からの荷重等の負荷が加わらない状態である。
嵌合突部351は、図50に示すように、一対の嵌合片352を有している。一対の嵌合片352は、周方向に間隔をあけて外側に向けて平行に延びる。一対の嵌合片352は、互いに離間・接近する周方向に弾性変形可能である。一対の嵌合片352は、それぞれ突起353と斜面354とを有している。突起353は、嵌合片352から周方向の外側に突出する。突起353は、先端側に向けて先細る。斜面354は、嵌合片352における外側の先端に位置する。斜面354は、嵌合片352における奥行方向の外側の端部の位置から奥行方向の内側に向かうにつれて周方向の外側に向かい突起353の先端に繋がる。
図51は、嵌合突部351が嵌合筒部356の内部に挿入された状態の正面図である。
そのため、嵌合突部351と嵌合筒部356の奥行方向における相対位置関係は、突起353と内面357との間の摩擦力を超える力(負荷)を加え、嵌合突部351を嵌合筒部356に対して相対移動させることで調整可能である。
また、嵌合突部351と嵌合筒部356は、突起353が内面357に接した状態で奥行方向に摺動可能であるため、第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離を、調整部350に対する奥行方向の距離調整操作時の負荷に応じて連続的に変化させることが可能である。そのため、無負荷状態における第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離を、任意の値に調整可能である。
また、本実施形態では、第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離を、負荷に応じて連続的に変化させることが可能であるため、距離調整操作時の他に、マウスピース部320を口腔内に装着したときに、ブラッシングに伴う負荷で距離が変化するため、さらに歯列へのフィット性を向上させることができる。
第3ブラシ部358は、奥行方向の中間点にピークを有する山形の毛丈プロファイルを有する。第3ブラシ部358が山形の毛丈プロファイルを有することで、歯同士の噛合面にフィットするプロファイルとなり、清掃力が向上する。第3ブラシ部358は、例えば、前歯と対向する位置に配置される。第3ブラシ部358が前歯と対向する位置に配置され上側と下側に突出しているため、第1ブラシ部341および第2ブラシ部371が届きにくい前歯の噛合面を効果的に清掃することができる。
調整部350による距離調整量が4mmを下回ると、歯に接して動かせない事態が生じる可能性がある。調整部350による距離調整量が18mmを上回ると、第1支持体331が舌に当たり、第2支持体361が唇に当たることで操作性が損なわれる可能性がある。
調整部350による距離調整量を4mm以上、18mm以下とすることにより、ブラシの長さに依らず、歯列にフィットさせるように調整することが可能になる。
調整部350による距離調整量が7mmを下回ると、歯に接して動かせない事態が生じる可能性がある。調整部350による距離調整量が21mmを上回ると、第1支持体331が舌に当たり、第2支持体361が唇に当たることで操作性が損なわれる可能性がある。
上記のように、調整部350を配置する各部位ごとに十分な距離調整量を有することで、どの口腔サイズにも適合させて、フィット性を高めることができる。
「ショアA硬度」は、JIS K 7215あるいはJIS K 6253に従って測定されるプラスチックのデュロメータA硬さを意味する。「ショアD硬度」は、JIS K 6253に規定されるデュローメータタイプDの硬度を意味する。
従って、硬度を上記の範囲とし、且つ、第1支持体331の硬度を第2支持体361の硬度よりも大きくすることで、第1ブラシ体330における第1支持体331と第2ブラシ体360における第2支持体361の動きの独立性が高まり、第1ブラシ部341および第2ブラシ部371が歯列形状やブラッシング動作に追従することが可能となり、歯列の頬側と舌側のそれぞれにフィットすることで清掃力が向上する。
さらに、第1ブラシ部341および第2ブラシ部371についても、硬度が上記範囲であるとより好ましく、軟質樹脂の硬度が上記の下限値未満の場合、掻き取り力の不足と、マウスピース部320が電動の場合は振動の伝達性不足も生じ清掃機能が低下する。
軟質樹脂の硬度が上記の上限値を超える場合、第1ブラシ部341および第2ブラシ部371が撓みにくくなりフィット性が低下して清掃機能が低下する。
ポリウレタンは、スチレン系やポリステル系などの他のエラストマーに比べて、引張強度および機械的な耐摩耗性が高い傾向にあるため、軟質樹脂にポリウレタンを用いることで、薄肉にしても破断しづらくなり、機械的な強度および長期の使用を可能にできる。
シリコーンは、特に高度の耐熱性と耐薬品性を有し、煮沸消毒や歯磨き粉の存在下での品質劣化を少なくできる。
第1支持体331における奥行方向の寸法L1としては、1.5mm以上、7mm以下であることが好ましい。第2支持体361における奥行方向の寸法L2としては、1.5mm以上、6mm以下であることが好ましい。第1支持体331における奥行方向の寸法L1のうち、θ方向の端部は、第2支持体361における当該端部の奥行方向の寸法L2よりも大きい
つまり、θ方向の端部において、第2支持体361における奥行方向の寸法L2は、第1支持体331における奥行方向の寸法L1よりも小さい(薄い)。
連結部380は、第1支持体331と第2支持体361を奥行方向で連結する。連結部380は、周方向の端部において第1支持体331と第2支持体361を連結する。連結部380は、噛合方向における中央の位置で第1支持体331と第2支持体361を連結する。
第4ブラシ部381は、奥行方向の中間点にピークを有する山形の毛丈プロファイルを有する。第4ブラシ部381が山形の毛丈プロファイルを有することで、歯同士の噛合面にフィットするプロファイルとなり、清掃力が向上する。第4ブラシ部381は、例えば、奥歯と対向する位置に配置される。第4ブラシ部381が奥歯と対向する位置に配置され上側と下側に突出しているため、第1ブラシ部341および第2ブラシ部371が届きにくい奥歯の噛合面を効果的に清掃することができる。
長さL11のうち長さL12の割合が30%を下回る場合、調整部350を用いて第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離を調整する際に、第1支持体331と第2支持体361の少なくとも一方が追従して動きにくくなるため、距離調整機能が低下する。長さL11のうち長さL12の割合が70%を上回る場合、調整部350の存在領域が小さくなり、調整部350による距離調整が波及する領域が周方向で制限され、距離調整機能が低下する。さらに、第1支持体331と第2支持体361との間における振動の伝達率が不十分となる。
加えて、周方向の中央位置において第1支持体331と第2支持体361が連結部380で連結されているため、マウスピース部320がぐらつかず距離調整後の形状を安定化させることができる。
そのため、調整部350の周囲に離間領域を十分に確保でき、調整部350における動作を阻害せず、また、調整部350における動作に追従するように周囲の距離間も可変させやすくなるため、フィット性をさらに高めることが可能になる。
加えて、周方向の中央位置において第1支持体331と第2支持体361が調整部350で連結されているため、マウスピース部320がぐらつかず距離調整後の形状を安定化させることができる。さらに、奥行方向および上述した最大幅Hの方向の距離調整機能を最大限発現できる。
続いて、マウスピース部320の第17実施形態について、図52を参照して説明する。
この図において、図45から図51に示す第16実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
これにより、第1支持体331は、基本となるU字形状を維持するとともに、歯列形状に沿うようアシストされるため、第1ブラシ部341によるフィット性と清掃力が向上し、さらに、口腔内に入れやすくなる。
これにより、第2支持体361は、基本となるU字形状を維持するとともに、歯列形状に沿うようアシストされるため、第2ブラシ部371によるフィット性と清掃力が向上し、さらに、口腔内に入れやすくなる。
さらに、シャフト314、第2支持体361(第2硬質プレート366)、調整部350および連結部380、第1支持体331(第1硬質プレート336)に順次向かって、振動の減衰を抑制した状態で伝えることが可能となり、歯列の清掃力を向上させることができる。
第1硬質プレート336および第2硬質プレート366の硬度をショアA硬度50以上とすることで、振動を効率的に伝達できる。第1硬質プレート336および第2硬質プレート366の硬度をショアD硬度75以下とすることで、第1ブラシ部341および第2ブラシ部371の歯列への追従性を高めることができる。
続いて、マウスピース部320の第18実施形態について、図53を参照して説明する。
この図において、図45から図51に示す第16実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
第18実施形態においては、調整部350における嵌合筒部356の構成が異なっている。
他の構成は、上記第16実施形態と同様である。
すなわち、本実施形態の調整部350においては、第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離が段階的に調整される。
続いて、マウスピース部320の第19実施形態について、図54を参照して説明する。
この図において、図45から図51に示す第16実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
第19実施形態においては、調整部350の構成が異なっている。
他の構成は、上記第16実施形態と同様である。
本実施形態の調整部350では、回転数とネジピッチの積に応じて、第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離を段階的に調整することができる。
また、ネジ軸356Aが把持部310から第2支持体361を貫通して内側に延びて、第1支持体331に固定されたナット部351Aと噛み合わされる構成であってもよい。
続いて、マウスピース部320の第20実施形態について、図55を参照して説明する。
この図において、図45から図51に示す第16実施形態の構成要素と同一の要素については同一符号を付し、その説明を省略する。
第20実施形態においては、調整部350の構成が異なっている。
筒状伸縮部356Bは、奥行方向に並び直径が異なる複数(図55では4つ)の円筒体367を有している。最大径を有する基端側の円筒体367は、第2支持体361に固定されている。最小径を有する先端側の円筒体367は、第1支持体331に固定されている。
また、本実施形態では、第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離を、負荷に応じて連続的に変化させることが可能であるため、距離調整操作時の他に、マウスピース部320を口腔内に装着したときに、ブラッシングに伴う負荷で距離が変化するため、さらに歯列へのフィット性を向上させることができる。
また、筒状伸縮部356Bが把持部310から第2支持体361を貫通して内側に延びて、最小径を有する先端側の円筒体367が第1支持体331に固定される構成であってもよい。
弾性変形体としては、ウレタン、ゴム等の素材で形成された部材を用いる構成や、バネを用いる構成、奥行方向に沿って内面側から外面側に向かうとともに、外面側から内面側に向かうことを繰り返すジャバラ筒部を用いる構成が挙げられる。
弾性変形体を用いる場合には、ブラッシングに伴う負荷で弾性変形体が奥行方向に弾性変形することで、第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離が受動的に調整される。弾性変形体を用いる構成の一例としては、上記実施形態で説明した連結部380を弾性変形可能な素材で形成することが挙げられる。
奥歯側は、歯間の凹みに応じて第1支持体331および第2支持体361の距離が変化するため、受動調整部を奥歯側に配置することで歯列へのフィット性が向上する。
前歯側は、歯間の凹みが小さく振動源が近いため、調整部350を前歯側に配置することで、より振動が伝えやすくなり清掃力が向上する。
この構成を取ることで、無負荷状態およびブラッシングに伴う負荷で第1支持体331と第2支持体361の奥行方向の距離を調整でき、さらに歯列へのフィット性を向上させることができる。
Claims (33)
- 把持部と、
前記把持部に連結される連結体と、
を有し、
前記連結体は、
第1成形体であるブラシ部と、
前記第1成形体とは異なる第2成形体であり、噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って前記ブラシ部を支持する支持体と、
を有し、
前記ブラシ部は、
土台部と、
前記土台部から延びるフィラメントと、
前記土台部に設けられ前記支持体と結合される結合部と、
を有する歯ブラシ。 - 前記ブラシ部は、前記周方向と、前記噛合方向と、前記周方向と前記噛合方向とに直交する奥行方向と、の少なくとも一方向に複数個配列される、
請求項1に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記ブラシ部の少なくとも1つは、前記土台部が前記周方向に沿って湾曲する、
請求項2に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記ブラシ部の少なくとも1つは、ショアA硬度40以上、ショアD硬度70以下の軟質樹脂で形成され、
前記土台部の前記奥行方向の厚さは、1mm以上、5mm以下である、
請求項2に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記ブラシ部は、前記奥行方向の外側と内側に離れてそれぞれ配置され、
前記外側の前記ブラシ部と前記内側の前記ブラシ部は、前記支持体における前記周方向の中央を含む中央領域と、前記支持体における前記周方向の端部に位置する端部領域と、をそれぞれ有し、
前記端部領域において前記外側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記フィラメントと、前記内側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記フィラメントとの距離は、前記中央領域において前記外側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記フィラメントと、前記内側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記フィラメントとの距離よりも大きい、
請求項2に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記フィラメントは、前記土台部のブラシ面から延び、
前記ブラシ面における前記周方向の両端を結ぶ直線距離は、5mm以上である、
請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記支持体は、前記ブラシ部よりも硬い樹脂で形成されている、
請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記ブラシ部は、前記周方向に配列された複数の前記フィラメントにおける根元部の配列ピッチと毛先部の配列ピッチが異なる箇所を有する、
請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記ブラシ部および前記支持体よりも高い硬度を有し、前記支持体を弾性変形させて前記周方向に沿って湾曲させる弾性部材を有する、
請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記把持部は、振動素子を含む電気駆動ユニットを有し、
前記連結体は、前記振動素子の駆動により振動する、
請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 把持部と、前記把持部に連結される連結体と、を有し、
前記連結体は、第1成形体であるブラシ部と、前記第1成形体とは異なる第2成形体であり、噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って前記ブラシ部を支持する支持体と、を有する歯ブラシのうち、
土台部と、前記土台部から延びるフィラメントと、前記土台部に設けられ前記支持体と結合される結合部と、を有する前記ブラシ部を準備することと、
前記支持体を準備することと、
前記支持体に前記結合部において前記ブラシ部を結合することと、
を含む歯ブラシ製造方法。 - 把持部と、
前記把持部に連結される連結体と、
を有し、
前記連結体は、
土台部に用毛の毛束が設けられたブラシ部と、
前記土台部とは異なる材料で成形され前記土台部の少なくとも一部を被覆し、噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って前記ブラシ部を支持する支持体と、
を有する歯ブラシ。 - 前記ブラシ部は、前記周方向と、前記周方向と前記噛合方向とに直交する奥行方向と、の少なくとも一方向に複数個配列される、
請求項12に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記ブラシ部は、前記奥行方向の外側と内側に離れてそれぞれ配置され、
前記外側の前記ブラシ部と前記内側の前記ブラシ部は、前記支持体における前記周方向の中央を含む中央領域と、前記支持体における前記周方向の端部に位置する端部領域と、をそれぞれを有し、
前記端部領域において前記外側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記毛束と、前記内側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記毛束との距離は、前記中央領域において前記外側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記毛束と、前記内側の前記ブラシ部における毛丈が最短の前記毛束との距離よりも大きい、
請求項13に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 複数の前記毛束が前記周方向に配列された毛束列が前記噛合方向に複数列で設けられ、
前記噛合方向の端部に位置する前記毛束列の少なくとも一方における前記毛束は、毛先部が根元部に対して前記端部側に傾斜している、
請求項12から14のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記ブラシ部は、前記周方向に配列された複数の前記毛束における根元部の配列ピッチと毛先部の配列ピッチが異なる箇所を有する、
請求項12から14のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記中央領域に位置する前記外側の前記ブラシ部における前記土台部の前記噛合方向の長さをWA1とし、
前記端部領域に位置する前記外側の前記ブラシ部における前記土台部の前記噛合方向の長さをWA3とし、
前記中央領域に位置する前記内側の前記ブラシ部における前記土台部の前記噛合方向の長さをWB1とし、
前記端部領域に位置する前記内側の前記ブラシ部における前記土台部の前記噛合方向の長さをWB3とすると、
WA1>WA3および
WB1>WB3
の関係をそれぞれ満足する、
請求項14に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記把持部は、振動素子を含む電気駆動ユニットを有し、
前記連結体は、前記振動素子の駆動により振動する、
請求項12から14のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 把持部と、前記把持部に連結される連結体と、を有し、
前記連結体は、土台部に用毛の毛束が設けられたブラシ部と、前記土台部とは異なる材料で成形され前記土台部の少なくとも一部を被覆し、噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って前記ブラシ部を支持する支持体と、を有する歯ブラシのうち、
前記ブラシ部を準備することと、
前記支持体を準備することと、
前記支持体に前記ブラシ部を結合することと、
を含む歯ブラシ製造方法。 - 把持部と、
前記把持部に噛合方向と直交する奥行方向の一方側に連結される連結体と、
を有し、
前記連結体は、
前記把持部よりも前記奥行方向の一方側に位置する第1ブラシ体と、
前記奥行方向について前記把持部と前記第1ブラシ体との間に位置し、前記第1ブラシ体に対して離れて配置された第2ブラシ体と、
を有し、
前記第1ブラシ体は、
前記噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿ってU字状に形成され、前記奥行方向の一方側に開口する第1支持体と、
前記第1支持体から前記奥行方向の他方側に延びる第1ブラシ部と、
を有し、
前記第2ブラシ体は、
前記周方向に沿ってU字状に形成され、前記奥行方向の一方側に開口する第2支持体と、
前記第2支持体から前記奥行方向の一方側に延びる第2ブラシ部と、
を有し、
前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体とは、前記奥行方向と前記周方向の双方に独立して相対移動可能である、歯ブラシ。 - 前記奥行方向で対向する位置の前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体とは、前記奥行方向の寸法を含む形状特性、または、硬度を含む素材特性が異なる、
請求項20に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記第1支持体における前記奥行方向の寸法は、1.5mm以上、7mm以下であり、
前記第2支持体における前記奥行方向の寸法は、1.5mm以上、6mm以下であり、
前記第1支持体における前記周方向の端部の前記奥行方向の寸法は、前記第2支持体における前記周方向の端部の前記奥行方向の寸法よりも大きい、
請求項21に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記第1支持体の前記周方向の長さのうち、前記奥行方向について前記第2支持体と離間する領域の長さの割合は、20%以上、70%以下である、
請求項20から22のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記第1支持体よりも硬質の樹脂で形成され、前記第1支持体に前記周方向に沿って設けられた第1硬質プレートと、前記第2支持体よりも硬質の樹脂で形成され、前記第2支持体に前記周方向に沿って設けられた第2硬質プレートのうち、少なくとも一方が設けられる、
請求項20から22のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記第1硬質プレートは、前記第1支持体に前記奥行方向の一方側への負荷が加わったときに、前記第1支持体に前記奥行方向の他方側へのテンションを付与し、
前記第2硬質プレートは、前記第2支持体に前記奥行方向の他方側への負荷が加わったときに、前記第2支持体に前記奥行方向の一方側へのテンションを付与する、
請求項24に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体を前記奥行方向で連結する連結部を有し、
前記連結部は、前記噛合方向の変形に応じて前記奥行方向に弾性変形する弾性体である、
請求項20から22のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体を前記奥行方向で連結する連結部を有し、
前記連結部が前記噛合方向に圧縮されたときに、前記第1支持体および前記第2支持体の少なくとも一部は、前記連結部における前記奥行方向の中央に向かって近づく、
請求項20から22のいずれか一項に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 把持部と、
前記把持部に噛合方向と直交する奥行方向の一方側に連結される連結体と、
を有し、
前記連結体は、
前記把持部よりも前記奥行方向の一方側に位置する第1ブラシ体と、
前記奥行方向について前記把持部と前記第1ブラシ体との間に位置し、前記第1ブラシ体に対して離れて配置された第2ブラシ体と、
を有し、
前記第1ブラシ体は、
前記噛合方向に延びる軸線を中心とする周方向に沿って、前記奥行方向の一方側に開口するU字状に形成された第1支持体と、
前記第1支持体から前記奥行方向の他方側に延びる第1ブラシ部と、
を有し、
前記第2ブラシ体は、
前記周方向に沿って、前記奥行方向の一方側に開口するU字状に形成された第2支持体と、
前記第2支持体から前記奥行方向の一方側に延びる第2ブラシ部と、
を有し、
無負荷状態における前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体の前記奥行方向の距離を調整可能な調整部を有する、歯ブラシ。 - 前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体は、前記奥行方向で離間する領域を有する、
請求項28に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記調整部は、前記第1支持体および前記第2支持体における前記周方向の中央位置に少なくとも設けられている、
請求項28または29に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記第1支持体よりも硬質の樹脂で形成され、前記第1支持体に前記周方向に沿って設けられた第1硬質プレートと、
前記第2支持体よりも硬質の樹脂で形成され、前記第2支持体に前記周方向に沿って設けられた第2硬質プレートのうち、少なくとも一方が設けられる、
請求項28または29に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記調整部は、前記第1支持体と前記第2支持体の前記距離を、前記調整部に対する前記奥行方向の負荷に応じて連続的に変化させることが可能である、
請求項28または29に記載の歯ブラシ。 - 前記調整部は、前記噛合方向の一方側と他方側の少なくとも一方に第3ブラシ部を有する、
請求項28または29に記載の歯ブラシ。
Priority Applications (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2024530402A JPWO2024004496A1 (ja) | 2022-06-30 | 2023-05-31 | |
| CN202380037808.4A CN119173225A (zh) | 2022-06-30 | 2023-05-31 | 牙刷和牙刷制造方法 |
Applications Claiming Priority (8)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2022-106249 | 2022-06-30 | ||
| JP2022106010 | 2022-06-30 | ||
| JP2022-106010 | 2022-06-30 | ||
| JP2022106249 | 2022-06-30 | ||
| JP2022-204420 | 2022-12-21 | ||
| JP2022204420 | 2022-12-21 | ||
| JP2022209653 | 2022-12-27 | ||
| JP2022-209653 | 2022-12-27 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2024004496A1 true WO2024004496A1 (ja) | 2024-01-04 |
Family
ID=89382696
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2023/020258 Ceased WO2024004496A1 (ja) | 2022-06-30 | 2023-05-31 | 歯ブラシおよび歯ブラシ製造方法 |
Country Status (3)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| JP (1) | JPWO2024004496A1 (ja) |
| CN (1) | CN119173225A (ja) |
| WO (1) | WO2024004496A1 (ja) |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS5893230U (ja) * | 1981-12-19 | 1983-06-24 | 熊谷 真知子 | 歯ブラシ |
| JPH04208105A (ja) * | 1990-11-30 | 1992-07-29 | Sachiko Muratsu | 歯磨装置 |
| JP2001211940A (ja) * | 2000-02-04 | 2001-08-07 | Masanori Sato | ブラシの製造方法 |
| JP2005334104A (ja) * | 2004-05-25 | 2005-12-08 | Satoshi Oshima | マウスピース状のブラシ台の湾曲度を可変とする噛む歯ブラシ |
| JP2018187020A (ja) * | 2017-05-01 | 2018-11-29 | 真弓 遠藤 | 歯洗浄装置 |
-
2023
- 2023-05-31 WO PCT/JP2023/020258 patent/WO2024004496A1/ja not_active Ceased
- 2023-05-31 JP JP2024530402A patent/JPWO2024004496A1/ja active Pending
- 2023-05-31 CN CN202380037808.4A patent/CN119173225A/zh active Pending
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS5893230U (ja) * | 1981-12-19 | 1983-06-24 | 熊谷 真知子 | 歯ブラシ |
| JPH04208105A (ja) * | 1990-11-30 | 1992-07-29 | Sachiko Muratsu | 歯磨装置 |
| JP2001211940A (ja) * | 2000-02-04 | 2001-08-07 | Masanori Sato | ブラシの製造方法 |
| JP2005334104A (ja) * | 2004-05-25 | 2005-12-08 | Satoshi Oshima | マウスピース状のブラシ台の湾曲度を可変とする噛む歯ブラシ |
| JP2018187020A (ja) * | 2017-05-01 | 2018-11-29 | 真弓 遠藤 | 歯洗浄装置 |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN119173225A (zh) | 2024-12-20 |
| JPWO2024004496A1 (ja) | 2024-01-04 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| AU706139B2 (en) | Resiliently flexible bristle bearing head toothbrush | |
| EP1187541B1 (en) | A toothbrush | |
| US6219874B1 (en) | Resiliently flexible bristle bearing head toothbrush | |
| AU2003285016B2 (en) | Toothbrush | |
| RU2370194C2 (ru) | Зубная щетка (варианты) | |
| TWI514976B (zh) | 口腔保健用具 | |
| TWI448261B (zh) | 口部照顧器具 | |
| CN100471417C (zh) | 一种牙刷 | |
| AU2008218865B2 (en) | Oral care implement | |
| RU2369305C1 (ru) | Зубная щетка, которая обеспечивает улучшенную очистку и комфортность | |
| US20170056147A1 (en) | Oral hygiene systems and methods | |
| CN102933114A (zh) | 具有封闭环圈布置的清洁元件的牙刷 | |
| JP2000503570A (ja) | ブラシヘッド | |
| JP4143982B2 (ja) | 歯列を跨いで磨く歯ブラシ | |
| CN112449587B (zh) | 振动式牙齿清洁装置、有机硅外壳、牙垫及其制造方法 | |
| WO2024004496A1 (ja) | 歯ブラシおよび歯ブラシ製造方法 | |
| JP3185736U (ja) | 歯ブラシ | |
| TW201924622A (zh) | 電動牙刷用替換刷頭以及電動牙刷 | |
| CN222841112U (zh) | 电动牙刷头及电动牙刷 | |
| CN223275533U (zh) | 刷头和口腔护理设备 | |
| WO2025223562A1 (zh) | 电动牙刷头及电动牙刷 | |
| JP2022063101A (ja) | マウスピース型歯ブラシ |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23830946 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2024530402 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
| WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2401006275 Country of ref document: TH |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 23830946 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |